JP2012176327A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusingness of a game during a specific game state.SOLUTION: When control is performed to come into a jackpot game state, a jackpot type is determined from among a plurality of types of jackpots including first normal and first probability-variation jackpots in which control for repeatedly performing unit rounds the same number of times is performed, and second normal and second probability-variation jackpots. In the first normal and first probability-variation jackpots, all the unit rounds for being repeatedly performed include a unit round for being controlled to a first opening mode control state (A). In the second normal and second probability-variation jackpots, the unit rounds for being repeatedly performed include the unit round for being controlled to the first opening mode control state, and a unit round for being controlled to a second opening mode control state, the period of which is shorter than a period of the first opening mode control state (B).

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, includes a variable display device that displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each of a plurality of types of identification information that is played by hitting a game ball into the game area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a variation display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  What is generally known as this type of gaming machine is, for example, a plurality of types of identification information such as pachinko gaming machines in which a game ball is shot into a gaming area and each can be identified. The game is provided with a variable display device that displays a variable (symbol), and a specific game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when the variable display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol). There was something to control.

  In such a gaming machine, as the specific gaming state, the variable winning device is disadvantageous for the player until the predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. The round control in which the unit round for performing the release mode control for changing from the state to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated a plurality of times is execution.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots with different opening modes of the variable winning device are provided, such as providing a plurality of types of jackpots with different opening times of the variable winning device, and depending on the displayed jackpot symbol There was one that selects the type of jackpot (Patent Document 1).

JP-A-9-225104 (paragraph number 0017, etc.)

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as described above, since the type of jackpot is selected according to the jackpot symbol, the opening mode of the variable winning device in the specific gaming state is found at the stage of starting the specific gaming state. There has been a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the game during the subsequent specific game state.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game in a specific gaming state.

(1) A variable display device (image display device 5) that displays a plurality of types of identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) that can be identified and variably displayed by hitting a game ball into the game area (game area 200). And a game machine that controls to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the variation display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (final stop combination of big hit combination) (Pachinko machine 1)
A variable winning device (special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player in the game area;
Pre-decision means for determining whether to control to the specific gaming state and the type of the specific gaming state before the variation display result of the identification information is derived and displayed (game controlling microcomputer 100, FIG. 43) S250, S253),
A variation pattern determining means (game control microcomputer 100, S274 in FIG. 44) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information based on a determination result by the prior determination means;
As the specific gaming state, mode control for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Specific game state control means (game control microcomputer 100, S114 to S116 in FIG. 41, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 49) capable of executing round control in which a unit round to be performed (one round) is repeated a plurality of times. )When,
During the variation display of the identification information, a variation display effect corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination unit is executed, and a specific game state effect corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is performed in the specific game state. Production execution means (production control CPU 120, S406 in FIG. 51, display control unit 123, sound control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc.) to be executed,
The pre-determining means performs a control for repeatedly executing the unit round the same number of times. The first specific gaming state (first normal and first certain change in FIG. 65A) and the second specific gaming state (FIG. 65). The type of the specific gaming state is determined from a plurality of types of specific gaming states (the jackpot type in FIG. 7) including (B) second normal and second probability variation) (S253 in FIG. 43),
The specific gaming state control means includes
The control mode of the unit round is variable until the first predetermined period (29.5 seconds) elapses or until the end condition (10 winning detections) is established before the first predetermined period elapses. A first mode control state (first release mode control state) for changing the winning device from the second state to the first state;
Until a second predetermined period (0.5 seconds) shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until an end condition (10 winning detections) is established before the second predetermined period elapses, The variable winning device can be controlled to any one of the second state control states (second release state control states) for changing the second state from the second state to the first state (FIGS. 48 and 65). Fig. 66),
In the first specific gaming state, all of the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state (first normal and first certain change in FIG. 65A),
In the second specific gaming state, the unit round that is repeatedly executed is controlled to the first mode control state or the second mode control state (second normal and second probability changes in FIG. 65B). ,
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display units (“left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.) as a variable display unit that displays the identification information in a variable manner,
The specific game state control means is configured to use the round control as the specific game state when a variation display result of the identification information sequentially derived and displayed by the plurality of variation display units becomes a predetermined specific display result. Is possible and
As a variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, a variation pattern storage unit (ROM 101, loss variation pattern setting table 141A in FIG. 10 and jackpot variation pattern setting table 141B in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) stores a plurality of variation patterns. 141E)
The plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means are:
Reach effect after starting the variation display of the identification information on all of the plurality of variation display units, and then displaying the identification information in a reach state in some variation display units among the plurality of variation display units. , And when the reach effect is completed, all effect specific variation patterns that derive and display the specific display result (variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5-1 to PA5-3, PA6-1 to FIG. 11) are displayed. PA6-5, PA7-1, PA7-2, PA8-1 to PA8-3, PA9-1 to PA9-5, etc.)
The variation display time is shorter than the all effect specific variation pattern, and is the same as the effect operation by the all effect specific variation pattern at a predetermined effect switching timing during the variation display of the identification information. A sudden specific variation pattern (variation pattern PT1-1 to Fig. 12 in Fig. 12) is switched from the production operation to a specific production different from the production operation by the all production specific variation pattern, and the specific display result is derived and displayed when the specific production is completed. PT1-4, PT2-1 to PT2-7, PT3-1 to PT3-6, etc.)
The sudden specific fluctuation pattern is a pre-reach sudden specific fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2- in FIG. 12) that becomes the effect switching timing before the fluctuation display state of the identification information becomes the reach state. 1, PT2-3 to PT2-5, PT2-7, PT3-1, PT3-3, PT3-4, etc.) and the changeover state of the identification information becomes the reach state, and the effect switching timing is reached. It includes a plurality of sudden specific fluctuation patterns including post reach reach specific fluctuation patterns (variation patterns PT2-2, PT2-6, PT3-2, PT3-5, PT3-6, etc. in FIG. 12) (FIG. 12).

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific gaming state, a plurality of types of specific gaming states including a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state that perform control to repeatedly execute a unit round the same number of times. The type of the specific gaming state is determined from the inside. In the specific gaming state, round control that repeatedly executes a unit round in which the mode control of the variable winning device is performed a plurality of times until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Is executed. And a first mode control state in which the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state until the first predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the first predetermined period elapses. The variable prize apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state until a second predetermined period shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the second predetermined period elapses. Control can be performed in any one of the second mode control states to be changed. In the first specific gaming state, all the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state, and in the second specific gaming state, the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are the first mode control state or the second mode. Since it is controlled in the mode control state, the overall configuration of the unit round throughout the specific game state is different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Thereby, the interest of the game in the specific game state can be improved by the aspect of the variable winning device in the specific game state in which the control is executed by repeating the unit round the same number of times. By the sudden reach big hit fluctuation pattern before reach, the change display state of the identification information is switched to the specific effect before the change display state becomes the reach state, and the specific display result is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect, The specific display result is derived and displayed in a short variation display time as compared to the total effect big hit variation pattern. In addition, due to the sudden reach big hit fluctuation pattern after reach, after the change display state of the identification information becomes the reach state, it switches to the specific effect at the effect switching timing, and the specific display result is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect. The specific display result is derived and displayed in a short variation display time as compared to the total effect big hit variation pattern. Thereby, it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the effect operation is switched to the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the unexpectedness of the specific display result and improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the change display state of the identification information is switched to the specific effect even before the reach state is reached, the expectation that the specific display result is obtained over the entire period during which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner is enhanced. Can be improved.

(2) A variable display device (image display device 5) that displays a plurality of types of identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) that can be identified and variably displayed by placing a game ball into the game area (game area 200). And a game machine that controls to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the variation display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (final stop combination of big hit combination) (Pachinko machine 1)
A variable winning device (special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player in the game area;
Pre-decision means for determining whether to control to the specific gaming state and the type of the specific gaming state before the variation display result of the identification information is derived and displayed (game controlling microcomputer 100, FIG. 43) S250, S253),
A variation pattern determining means (game control microcomputer 100, S274 in FIG. 44) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information based on a determination result by the prior determination means;
As the specific gaming state, mode control for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Specific game state control means (game control microcomputer 100, S114 to S116 in FIG. 41, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 49) capable of executing round control in which a unit round to be performed (one round) is repeated a plurality of times. )When,
During the variation display of the identification information, a variation display effect corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination unit is executed, and a specific game state effect corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is performed in the specific game state. Production execution means (production control CPU 120, S406 in FIG. 51, display control unit 123, sound control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc.) to be executed,
The pre-determining means performs a control for repeatedly executing the unit round the same number of times. The first specific gaming state (first normal and first certain change in FIG. 65A) and the second specific gaming state (FIG. 65). The type of the specific gaming state is determined from a plurality of types of specific gaming states (the jackpot type in FIG. 7) including (B) second normal and second probability variation) (S253 in FIG. 43),
The specific gaming state control means includes
The control mode of the unit round is variable until the first predetermined period (29.5 seconds) elapses or until the end condition (10 winning detections) is established before the first predetermined period elapses. A first mode control state (first release mode control state) for changing the winning device from the second state to the first state;
Until a second predetermined period (0.5 seconds) shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until an end condition (10 winning detections) is established before the second predetermined period elapses, The variable winning device can be controlled to any one of the second state control states (second release state control states) for changing the second state from the second state to the first state (FIGS. 48 and 65). Fig. 66),
In the first specific gaming state, all of the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state (first normal and first certain change in FIG. 65A),
In the second specific gaming state, the unit round that is repeatedly executed is controlled to the first mode control state or the second mode control state (second normal and second probability changes in FIG. 65B). ,
It further comprises operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player,
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display units (“left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.) as a variable display unit that displays the identification information in a variable manner,
The specific game state control means is configured to use the round control as the specific game state when a variation display result of the identification information sequentially derived and displayed by the plurality of variation display units becomes a predetermined specific display result. Is possible and
As a variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, a variation pattern storage unit (ROM 101, loss variation pattern setting table 141A in FIG. 10 and jackpot variation pattern setting table 141B in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) stores a plurality of variation patterns. 141E)
The plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means are:
Reach effect after starting the variation display of the identification information on all of the plurality of variation display units, and then displaying the identification information in a reach state in some variation display units among the plurality of variation display units. , And when the reach effect is completed, all effect specific variation patterns that derive and display the specific display result (variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5-1 to PA5-3, PA6-1 to FIG. 11) are displayed. PA6-5, PA7-1, PA7-2, PA8-1 to PA8-3, PA9-1 to PA9-5, etc.)
The variation display time is shorter than the all-effects specific variation pattern, and the variation display state of the identification information is reached after the variation display of the identification information is started in all of the plurality of variation display units. Before entering the state, after the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means is executed in parallel with the fluctuation display of the identification information, the operation is switched to the specific effect and specified when the specific effect ends. Abrupt specific variation patterns for deriving and displaying the display results (variation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2-1 to PT2-7, PT3-1 to PT3-6, etc. in FIG. 12),
The effect execution means switches to the specific effect at the timing when the operation means is operated within the operation effective period during the operation promotion effect based on the sudden specific variation pattern (see FIG. 60B). The sudden effect is started by “button operation detection”), and when the specific effect ends, the specific display result is derived and displayed, and then the variation display time of the identification information by the predetermined sudden variation pattern elapses. The derivation display of the specific display result is continued until all symbols are temporarily stopped following the sudden effect shown in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific gaming state, a plurality of types of specific gaming states including a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state that perform control to repeatedly execute a unit round the same number of times. The type of the specific gaming state is determined from the inside. In the specific gaming state, round control that repeatedly executes a unit round in which the mode control of the variable winning device is performed a plurality of times until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Is executed. And a first mode control state in which the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state until the first predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the first predetermined period elapses. The variable prize apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state until a second predetermined period shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the second predetermined period elapses. Control can be performed in any one of the second mode control states to be changed. In the first specific gaming state, all the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state, and in the second specific gaming state, the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are the first mode control state or the second mode. Since it is controlled in the mode control state, the overall configuration of the unit round throughout the specific game state is different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Thereby, the interest of the game in the specific game state can be improved by the aspect of the variable winning device in the specific game state in which the control is executed by repeating the unit round the same number of times. Switch to a specific effect at the timing when the operating means is operated by the sudden jackpot variation pattern, and the specific display result is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect, so it can be identified in a shorter variation display time than the all effect jackpot variation pattern The display result is derived and displayed. As a result, it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed if the production operation is switched to the specific production when the operation means is operated. Therefore, the specific display result is derived and displayed when the operation means is operated. The effect of surprise can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) A variable display device (image display device 5) that displays a plurality of types of identification information (decorative symbols, etc.) that can be identified and variably displayed by placing a game ball into the game area (game area 200). And a game machine that controls to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the variation display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (final stop combination of big hit combination) (Pachinko machine 1)
A variable winning device (special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player in the game area;
Pre-decision means for determining whether to control to the specific gaming state and the type of the specific gaming state before the variation display result of the identification information is derived and displayed (game controlling microcomputer 100, FIG. 43) S250, S253),
Reach determination for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information in the variable display device is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the control is not performed to the specific gaming state by the prior determination unit. Means (game control microcomputer 100, S266 in FIG. 44);
Based on the determination result by the prior determination unit and the determination result by the reach determination unit, the variation pattern type determination unit (the game control microcomputer 100, which determines the variation pattern type of the identification information to be one of a plurality of types) S271) of FIG. 44,
Based on the determination result by the pre-determining unit, the variation pattern determining unit (the game control microcomputer 100, which determines a variation pattern from the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determining unit. S274) of FIG. 44,
As the specific gaming state, mode control for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Specific game state control means (game control microcomputer 100, S114 to S116 in FIG. 41, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 49) capable of executing round control in which a unit round to be performed (one round) is repeated a plurality of times. )When,
During the variation display of the identification information, a variation display effect corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination unit is executed, and a specific game state effect corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is performed in the specific game state. Production execution means (production control CPU 120, S406 in FIG. 51, display control unit 123, sound control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc.) to be executed,
The pre-determining means performs a control for repeatedly executing the unit round the same number of times. The first specific gaming state (first normal and first certain change in FIG. 65A) and the second specific gaming state (FIG. 65). The type of the specific gaming state is determined from a plurality of types of specific gaming states (the jackpot type in FIG. 7) including (B) second normal and second probability variation) (S253 in FIG. 43),
The specific gaming state control means includes
The control mode of the unit round is variable until the first predetermined period (29.5 seconds) elapses or until the end condition (10 winning detections) is established before the first predetermined period elapses. A first mode control state (first release mode control state) for changing the winning device from the second state to the first state;
Until a second predetermined period (0.5 seconds) shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until an end condition (10 winning detections) is established before the second predetermined period elapses, The variable winning device can be controlled to any one of the second state control states (second release state control states) for changing the second state from the second state to the first state (FIGS. 48 and 65). Fig. 66),
In the first specific gaming state, all of the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state (first normal and first certain change in FIG. 65A),
In the second specific gaming state, the unit round that is repeatedly executed is controlled to the first mode control state or the second mode control state (second normal and second probability changes in FIG. 65B). ,
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display units (“left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.) as a variable display unit that displays the identification information in a variable manner,
The specific game state control means is configured to use the round control as the specific game state when a variation display result of the identification information sequentially derived and displayed by the plurality of variation display units becomes a predetermined specific display result. Is possible and
As a variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, a variation pattern storage unit (ROM 101, loss variation pattern setting table 141A in FIG. 10 and jackpot variation pattern setting table 141B in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) stores a plurality of variation patterns. 141E)
The plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means are:
After starting the variable display of the identification information on all of the plurality of variable display units, a reach effect is obtained after the identification information is derived and displayed in a reach state on some of the plurality of variable display units. All the effect specific variation patterns that are executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed when the reach effect ends (variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5-1 to PA5-3, PA6-1 to PA6 in FIG. 11). -5, PA7-1, PA7-2, PA8-1 to PA8-3, PA9-1 to PA9-5, etc.)
The variation display time is shorter than the all effect specific variation pattern, and is the same as the effect operation by the all effect specific variation pattern at a predetermined effect switching timing during the variation display of the identification information. A sudden specific variation pattern (variation pattern PT1-1 to Fig. 12 in Fig. 12) is switched from the production operation to a specific production different from the production operation by the all production specific variation pattern, and the specific display result is derived and displayed when the specific production is completed. PT1-4, PT2-1 to PT2-7, PT3-1 to PT3-6, etc.)
The sudden specific variation pattern is a pre-reach sudden specific variation pattern (variation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2-1, PT2) that becomes the effect switching timing before the variation display state of the identification information becomes the reach state. -3 to PT2-5, PT2-7, PT3-1, PT3-3, PT3-4, etc.), and the after-reach burst that becomes the effect switching timing when the variation display state of the identification information becomes the reach state Including a plurality of sudden specific variation patterns, including specific variation patterns (variation patterns PT2-2, PT2-6, PT3-2, PT3-5, PT3-6, etc.)
The effect executing means executes any of a plurality of pre-switching effect operations determined at different determination ratios according to the effect switching timing in the sudden change pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means (game) In response to the CPU 103 of the control microcomputer 100 determining the variation pattern as one of the variation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2-1 to PT2-7, PT3-1 to PT3-6 in S274 of FIG. Then, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of S523 and S527 of FIG. 54, the process of S544 of FIG. 55 is executed based on the effect control pattern determined in S506 of FIG.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific gaming state, a plurality of types of specific gaming states including a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state that perform control to repeatedly execute a unit round the same number of times. The type of the specific gaming state is determined from the inside. In the specific gaming state, round control that repeatedly executes a unit round in which the mode control of the variable winning device is performed a plurality of times until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Is executed. And a first mode control state in which the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state until the first predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the first predetermined period elapses. The variable prize apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state until a second predetermined period shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the second predetermined period elapses. Control can be performed in any one of the second mode control states to be changed. In the first specific gaming state, all the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state, and in the second specific gaming state, the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are the first mode control state or the second mode. Since it is controlled in the mode control state, the overall configuration of the unit round throughout the specific game state is different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Thereby, the interest of the game in the specific game state can be improved by the aspect of the variable winning device in the specific game state in which the control is executed by repeating the unit round the same number of times. By the sudden reach big hit fluctuation pattern before reach, the change display state of the identification information is switched to the specific effect before the change display state becomes the reach state, and the specific display result is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect, The specific display result is derived and displayed in a short variation display time as compared to the total effect big hit variation pattern. In addition, by the sudden reach big hit fluctuation pattern after reach, the change display state of the identification information is switched to the specific effect after the change display state of the identification information becomes the reach state, and the specific display result is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect. The specific display result is derived and displayed in a short variation display time as compared to the total effect big hit variation pattern. Thereby, it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the effect operation is switched to the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the unexpectedness of the specific display result and improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the change display state of the identification information is switched to the specific effect even before the reach state is reached, the expectation that the specific display result is obtained over the entire period during which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner is enhanced. Can be improved. In addition, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of the plurality of pre-switching effect operations according to the effect switching timing at which the effect is switched to the specific effect. Thereby, according to the effect | action effect | action performed, the expectation of switching to a specific effect | action at different timings can be varied, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (4) For a unit round that has not yet been executed in the specific gaming state, it is suggested which of the first aspect control state and the second aspect control state the round control is performed in. In addition, it further includes suggestion effect means (effect control CPU 120, S164 in FIG. 52) for performing the suggestion effect (the suggestion effect including the battle effects shown in FIGS. 63 and 64) during execution of the specific game state.

  According to such a configuration, for the unit round that has not yet been executed in the specific gaming state, the round control in which of the first release mode control state and the second release mode control state is performed. Since the suggestion effect that suggests whether or not to be performed is performed during execution of the specific game state, it is possible to tell which release mode control state is in effect as the effect, and further enhance the interest of the game in the specific game state Can be made.

(5) It further comprises operation means (operation button 30) that can be operated by the player,
The suggestion effect means executes the suggestion effect based on an operation by the operation means (when the effect control CPU 120 receives an operation detection signal from the operation button 30 in S164 of FIG. (Control is performed to repeatedly display an image that falls after the character 51 stands up).

  According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect is executed based on the operation by the operation means, the interest of the game in the specific game state is further improved by the cooperation between the operation feeling of the operation means and the suggestion effect. be able to.

  (6) The temporary display of the identification information that is the non-specific display result is temporarily stopped until the display result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the identification information, and then the variable display is again executed for all the identification information. Performs a re-variation effect in which the variation is executed once or a plurality of times (the variation pattern type includes a variation pattern type that becomes a quasi-continuous variation pattern of non-reach loss of CA1-4, CB1-3, and CC1-3. Re-variation effect means (in the effect control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the processing of S507 to S509 in FIG. 53 and S541 to 544 in FIG. 55 based on the variation pattern including the effect of “pseudo-continuous”). In addition.

  According to such a configuration, after the identification information variation display is started and the display result is derived and displayed, the identification information that is the non-specific display result is temporarily stopped and then the variation display is performed for all the identification information. A re-variation effect is performed in which re-variation to be performed again is performed once or a plurality of times. By performing such a re-variation effect, the range of the variable display effect can be widened, so that the entertainment of the game based on the variable display effect can be further improved.

(7) The pre-determining unit is configured such that all of the unit rounds are set as the third specific gaming state (the jackpot type of accuracy) controlled in the second mode control state and the unit round executed for the first time. A third mode in which the winning device is changed from the second state to the first state until a third predetermined period longer than the second predetermined period elapses after the winning device is controlled to the same state as the second mode control state. The type of the specific gaming state is selected from among a plurality of types further including a fourth specific gaming state (a big hit type of a sixth probability change (15 rounds big hit)) that is controlled to a control state (fourth release mode control state). Determined (S253 in FIG. 7 and FIG. 43),
The production execution means
Executed in the first specific gaming state during the display of the variation of the identification information and over the specific gaming state when the prior determination means determines that the type of the specific gaming state is the third specific gaming state. 68. A series of special effects different from the above-described variation display effects and the specific game state effects are executed (the image display shown in FIG. 68 is performed by the decorative symbol variation process in S162 in FIG. 52 and the big hit control effect process in S164). Run)
When it is determined by the pre-determining means that the type of the specific gaming state is the fourth specific gaming state, the series of states is displayed over the second mode control state during the change display of the identification information and the specific gaming state. The special game state effect that is executed in the first specific game state from the end of the special effect is executed (the decorative symbol variation processing in S162 of FIG. 52 and the big hit control effect of S164) The image display shown in FIG. 70 is executed by the processing).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the pre-decision means that the type of the specific gaming state is the fourth specific gaming state, it is the same as when the determination is made halfway until the third specific gaming state is made. Controlled to the two-mode control state. Furthermore, when controlled to the second mode control state in this way, a series of special effects are executed in the same manner as when the third specific gaming state is determined. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the type of the specific gaming state is the third specific gaming state or the fourth specific gaming state, and is more unexpected in the variation display of the identification information and in the specific gaming state. A certain production can be executed.

  (8) Which one of the plurality of effect operations executed during the variation display of the identification information is executed is determined by the predetermining means as the type of the specific game state with the first specific game state. It is determined at a different rate depending on whether the determination is made or the determination is made to be the fourth specific gaming state (refer to the jackpot variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 in S274 of FIG. 44). To determine the variation pattern).

  According to such a configuration, the type of the specific gaming state is determined as the first specific gaming state by the predetermining means as to which of the plurality of rendering operations to be executed during the variation display of the identification information. Since it is determined at a different rate depending on whether the determination is made or whether the determination is made to be the fourth specific gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the variation display of the identification information.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the mission start chance eyes, and the sudden chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern setting table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a non-reach loss variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach loss variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation variation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notification effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a mission start effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of various effect control pattern tables. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of an opening | release control pattern, and the opening setting example of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of the decoration symbol change completion. It is a figure which illustrates the time schedule of the display process by a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates the time schedule of the display process by a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of a decoration symbol. It is a figure which illustrates the time schedule of the display process by a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the variation display of a decoration symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the advancing example of the production | presentation operation | movement from the start to the completion | finish after the variation display of a decoration symbol is started. It is a display screen figure which shows the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in 15 round big hit state. It is a display screen figure which shows the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus in 15 round big hit state. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the opening aspect of the special variable prize-winning ball apparatus in 15 round big hit state, and the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the opening aspect of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in 15 rounds big hit state, and the effect image displayed on an image display apparatus. For explaining a display operation example in a special symbol display device, a display operation example in an image display device, and an open / close operation example in a special variable winning ball device when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” It is a timing chart. A display operation example in the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” is shown. A display operation example in the special symbol display device, a display operation example in the image display device, and an open / close operation example in the special variable winning ball device when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probability change” will be described. It is a timing chart for. A display operation example in the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probable change” is shown. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a coin gaming machine or other gaming machines such as a slot machine. A game is performed when a game is performed and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are variably displayed. When the variation display result of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result, Any gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player may be used.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 200 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 200, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area 200). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of what is turned on and what is turned off in a 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area 200 on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to For example, in a decorative symbol display unit serving as a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are displayed in a variable manner. The variation display of the decorative design is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in the special figure game, any one of the fluctuation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the fluctuation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Corresponding to this, the decorative display of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is displayed in a variable manner (for example, a vertical or horizontal scroll display). Be started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game (completely stopped display), the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L in the image display device 5 are displayed. At 5C and 5R, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the decorative symbol variation display result is stopped (completely stopped). The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are movable within the display area of the image display device 5, and display the decorative symbols in a reduced or enlarged manner. You may be able to do that. When the special symbol or the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the display result in the variable display of each symbol is definitely displayed, and thereafter, the display state is such that the player can recognize that the current variable display does not proceed. On the other hand, during the variation display from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol until the finalized decorative symbol that is the variation display result is completely stopped, the variation rate of the decorative symbol becomes “0”. Ornamental symbols may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not deterministically displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Stopping and displaying the display symbol to the extent that the player can recognize that the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not progressing like the complete stop display or the temporary stop display is also referred to as a derivation display.

  For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) may be used as the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, effect images showing eight characters related to a predetermined motif, effect images combining numbers, characters or symbols and characters, and the like. The effect image indicating the character may include, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, or a symbol such as a character, or an image indicating any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of types of decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner is not limited to eight, but may be any number of decorative symbols.

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, for example, from top to bottom. Alternatively, a scrolling display that flows from the right side to the left side is performed. Then, when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display 5H is also arranged. In the start winning memory display section 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display is generated when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a decorative pattern change display is established, but a variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  As an example, the start winning memory display section 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when either the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) or the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, when performing the hold memory display, the special figure hold memory number based on the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition or the second start condition. If it is not possible to specify whether or not there is, the number of display parts corresponding to the number of special figure hold memories may be changed to a gray display to change the display form of the special figure hold memory number to a predetermined display form. .

  Note that the start winning memory display unit 5H may allow the player or the like to recognize the special figure reserved memory number by displaying a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display unit 5H or instead of the start winning memory display unit 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display portion 5H, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  The display area of the image display device 5 may be provided with a color symbol display area for variably displaying a color symbol as identification information different from the decorative symbol. As an example, in the color symbol display area, when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the variation of the color symbol (for example, display color update display) is started. When the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started by the “left” color symbol display unit and the second special symbol display device 4B, the variation of the color symbol is started. The display part should just be included. Then, when the fixed special symbol that is the variation display result in the special figure game is completely stopped and displayed, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that is the variation display result of the color symbol is completely stopped and displayed. For example, four types of symbols (“yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) are included in the “left” and “right” color symbol display sections. As long as the color pattern is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. As an example, the symbol numbers “1” to “4” only need to be assigned to the “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue” color symbols.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a predetermined solenoid for a normal electric accessory (normally A second start winning opening is provided. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball is unlikely to enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid is turned on, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value. 2 Start conditions are established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the prize ball to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  In the game area 200, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and is opened (first state advantageous to the player) and closed ( By changing to the second state, which is disadvantageous for the player, a big winning opening is formed in which the ease of accepting the game ball changes. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area 200 in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed. Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Note that the normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, the symbols indicating “−”, and the like as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed or lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. . At the lowermost part of the game area 200, there is provided an out-port for taking in game balls that have not entered any winning opening. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area 200. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 200 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 200, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided. For example, at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the center position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided. Note that the operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed, and may be a button that can be rotated, such as a rotary selector, or a touch operation or a pressing operation, such as a touch panel. It may be a thing, and the thing which can be tilted like a lever type switch may be sufficient. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 30 only needs to be able to detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  In the normal game using the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area 200 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the general map start condition for starting the normal symbol variable display, such as the end of the previous general map game, has been established To be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined variation display time elapses after starting the variation of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variation display result of the normal symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. The normal symbol variable display time may be determined as one of a plurality of types of variable display time by, for example, extracting numerical data indicating a predetermined random value at the start of each normal game. . If a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol which is a normal symbol variation display result in the normal game, the normal symbol variation display result is obtained. It becomes "per ordinary figure". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol is “usually lost”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variation display result is “per normal figure”, an expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, and for a predetermined time. After the elapse of time, normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  The special game by the first special symbol display device 4A is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. The process starts when the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is satisfied when the current special figure game using the first special figure can be started, for example, when the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state is ended. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. Is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is satisfied when the current special figure game using the second special figure can be started, for example, when the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variation display is started, when the predetermined variation display time elapses, the special symbol variation display result is confirmed. The special symbol is displayed as a complete stop. The special symbol variation display time is, for example, numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type as shown in FIG. 5 or numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern at the start of each special symbol game. Corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the above, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation display times. If a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol that will be displayed as a special symbol variation display result in a special symbol game, the special display result will be a “big hit” and a special symbol other than the big bonus symbol (losing) If the symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes “losing” as a non-specific display result. After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and the symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (15 round big hit state) as the specific game state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is a big prize opening The unit round for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 from the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is made 15 times by making the state open. Control to be executed is performed. The control mode of the open state of the big prize opening is the first release mode that opens for the first period (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second release mode that opens for the second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period. Control is performed so as to be one of a plurality of types of opening modes including a third opening mode in which a third period (eg, 29.0 seconds) that is shorter than the first period and longer than the second period is opened.

  As the control mode of each unit round, a plurality of types of control modes including a first release mode control state, a second release mode control state, a third release mode control state, and a fourth release mode control state are used. .

  The first release mode control state is large during a unit round until a grand prize opening is opened for a first period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. This is a control mode in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player by opening the winning opening. Further, the second release mode control state is a period until the grand prize opening is released for the second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated during the unit round. This is a control mode in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the special winning opening.

  In the third opening mode control state, a predetermined number (e.g., eight times) that the special winning opening is opened for the second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and closed for the second period is repeated a plurality of times (for example, eight times). This is a control mode in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the large winning opening during a period until 10 winning balls are generated. In the fourth release mode control state, during the unit round, after the grand prize opening is opened for the second period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the second period is closed, and thereafter, the third period (for example, 29.0 seconds) is opened. Control that changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the large winning opening until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. It is an aspect.

  In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round (unit round) which is the open cycle of the big winning opening is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the above-described second release mode control state ( For example, the number of executions of the unit round is controlled to be a second number (for example, “2”) which is smaller than the first number in the 15-round big hit state. In the two-round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  In a specific jackpot game state (a rushed fifteen round jackpot state) among the specific game states controlled after the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, as a unit round executed for the first time The open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 opens the large winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) which is the second period, so that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is advantageous to the player. After changing to the first state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is temporarily changed to the second state which is disadvantageous for the player by closing the special winning opening, and then longer than the second period. A special variable prize is awarded by opening the big prize opening in the third period (for example, 29.0 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls are generated. After rounds of changing to an advantageous first state device 7 for the player is executed once, round one fewer than the first number (e.g. "14") is executed. In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the fourth release state control state (0.5 seconds + 29.29) as a unit round executed for the first time in a specific jackpot gaming state (a stubborn 15-round jackpot state). In this example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be in the first opening mode control state (opening for 29.5 seconds) in each of the second to fifteenth rounds. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a specific jackpot gaming state (15-round jackpot state), as a unit round executed for the first time, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled in the second release mode control state (0.5 seconds). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 may be controlled to be in the first opening mode control state (opening for 29.5 seconds) in each of the second to fifteenth rounds (this is opened for 29.5 seconds). In the second release mode control state, the number of times of opening for 0.5 seconds may be one time or two times).

  In this embodiment, the 15-round big hit as a definite special symbol in the special figure game is controlled in any of the 15-round big hit state other than the sudden appearance 15-round big hit state and the 15-round big hit state. It is described that the symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”) are displayed in a stopped state. However, when the control is performed in a 15 round big hit state other than the sudden appearance 15 round big hit state, the sudden appearance 15 Different jackpot symbols may be displayed depending on when the game is controlled to the round jackpot state. As an example, when controlling to a round 15 big hit state other than a stunning fifteen round big hit state, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are set to the 15 round big hit symbol as in the above, and “9” A special symbol indicating the number of may be newly provided, and this may be used as a crisp fake 15 round big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed when controlled to a frightening fake 15 round big hit state. Also, different big hit symbols may be controlled to be stopped and displayed for all the big hits including the big hit state other than the sudden hit fake 15 round big hit state and the big hit state other than the sudden hit fake 15 round big hit state. In addition, when changing the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state in each round in the two-round big hit state, the first round (first time in the fifteen round big hit state) In the unit round executed in the first round, the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the second After the elapse of the period, the second state is returned to the second state, and then, in the same first round, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous for the player to the first state which is advantageous for the player. It is sufficient to return to the second state after the specific period has elapsed.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. If the time-short state ends when one of the conditions is satisfied first, among a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure game being executed and the fluctuation display result being “big hit”, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it become a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is This is usually referred to as a big hit symbol (also referred to as a “non-probable big hit symbol”). Fluctuation display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol is a special jackpot symbol in the special game is a variation of “normal” (also called “normal jackpot”) when the variation display result is “big hit” It is referred to as a display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. 2 rounds based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which becomes the 2 round big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game after the state (including the 15th round big hit state) After the big hit state is over, as one of the special gaming states different from the short-time state, for example, the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed. It is controlled to a probability variation state (high probability gaming state). In this probability variation state, the variation display result of each special figure game or decorative symbol variation display becomes “big hit”, and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit gaming state is improved to be higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next fluctuation display result becomes “big hit”, regardless of the number of times of execution of the special figure game. On the other hand, after entering the certainty change state, one of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even if the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability variation state or before the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the probability variation state is terminated at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be.

  Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol controlled to the probable change state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a probabilistic big hit symbol. It is called. Fluctuation display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols when the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a probable big hit symbol The fluctuation display mode of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a change of “probable change” (also called “probable big hit”) when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” It is referred to as a display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”). Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. When the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol, the variation display mode of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is “surprise” (“surprise big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. ")" As a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type").

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol fluctuation display time in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol fluctuation display result is “normal” in each regular game. Control for improving the probability of “per figure” compared to that in the normal state, when the tilt time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure” is in the normal state The player can be more likely to satisfy the second start condition by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening, such as a control for making it longer and a control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control is performed which is advantageous to the user. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol variation display is performed corresponding to the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 4 </ b> A or the second special symbol display device 4 </ b> B. That is, on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, a “left”, “middle”, or “right” decorative symbol display unit based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Decorative symbols are accelerated (all symbols accelerated display) in all of 5L, 5C, and 5R, and when a predetermined speed is reached, the ornament symbols are displayed at a constant speed (all symbols constant speed display). Such all symbol acceleration display and all symbol constant speed display are included in all symbol variations in which the ornament symbols are variably displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. . After all the symbols change, for example, “decrease” display of the decorative symbols (each symbol deceleration display) is performed in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. While stopping and displaying, for example, temporary stop display that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction is performed. When the elapsed time from the start of the decorative pattern variation display reaches the variation display time determined on the basis of the variation pattern or the like, the fixed ornament pattern that is the variation display result is displayed in a completely stopped state. Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to displaying the decorative symbols in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, a decorative symbol that is a confirmed decorative symbol may be displayed at a reduced speed (all symbols are displayed in a reduced manner).

  After all symbols change is started, the decorative symbols are reach-displayed on all or some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It may be derived and displayed in the state. Here, the reach display state is a decoration that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol derived and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (a combination of the jackpot symbol). For symbols (also referred to as “reach variation symbols”), the display state is continuously changing, or all or some of the decorative symbols are changing synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination It is a state. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.) is predetermined. The remaining decorative symbol display part (for example, “medium” decorative symbol) that has not yet been derived and displayed when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the selected jackpot combination is derived and displayed. In the display portion 5C, etc., the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are all or partly combined The display state changes in synchronization while constituting all or a part of the above. Corresponding to the reach display state, an effect image such as an animation image or a live-action image different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, There are times when the variation pattern of the decorative design is changed. Such an effect image display, background image display mode change, and decorative pattern change mode change are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). Some reach productions are set such that when they appear, a big hit is likely to occur (a high probability is a big win) compared to a normal reach production (normal reach). Such a special reach production is also called a super reach production (or simply “super reach”). As an example, for reach production that becomes super reach, after performing a reach production similar to normal reach until a predetermined time elapses, for example, a decorative pattern such as a display mode of a background image, a displayed character, a variation direction of a decorative pattern, etc. The change of the production mode (so-called “development”) by changing at least one of the fluctuation modes before the reach display state or at the time of the normal reach, and the reach production peculiar to the super reach It is sufficient if the introduction part in is started. In addition, in the reach production that becomes super reach, when the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the introduction part in the reach production peculiar to super reach is started without performing the reach production similar to the normal reach. Things may be included.

  During the decorative display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the decorative display of the variable display state may become the reach display state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a specific effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a decorative display variation display mode or the like. In this embodiment, an effect operation that is a specific effect of the “pseudo train” is set to be executable. Here, the specific effect of the “pseudo train” is that all symbol variations start in response to the first start condition or the second start condition for starting the variation display of special symbols and decorative symbols being established once. Then, the decorative symbols are displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R sequentially or simultaneously, and then “left”, “middle”, This is an effect operation in which the re-variation display operation (re-variation) for starting the re-variation display of the decoration symbols in all of the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is executed a predetermined number of times. That is, in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, pseudo continuous variation display (also referred to as pseudo continuous variation) is performed in response to the first start condition or the second start condition being satisfied once. As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 as shown in FIG. Any of a plurality of types of decorative symbol combinations predetermined as -GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, it is only necessary to set so that the rate at which the variation display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of re-variations increases. Thereby, the player can recognize that the specific effect of the “pseudo ream” is performed by temporarily stopping and displaying any one of the pseudo ream chances GC1 to GC8, and as the number of re-variations increases. In addition, the expectation that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variation is performed once to three times, so that the variation of the decorative pattern is based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it has been started 2-4 times in a row. In the following description, the number of re-variations that is executed from when the decorative symbol variation display is started until the final stop symbol is stopped based on the first start condition or the second start condition being satisfied once (for example, “1” to “3”) is also referred to as the number of times of quasi-continuous re-variation, and the number of variations of decorative symbols (for example, “2” to ˜ “4”) is also referred to as the number of pseudo-continuations. That is, the number of times of pseudo-continuations is a value obtained by adding “1” to the number of times of re-variation among pseudo-continuations.

  An effect image showing a character prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, with the progress of the pseudo continuous change during the display of the variation of the decorative pattern in which the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Is displayed, a predetermined sound (special sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a predetermined lighting pattern, and is provided in the game area 200 or outside the game area 200. A predetermined effect operation such as operating a plurality of movable members included in the effect accessory may be executed. As an example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed on all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R again, A pseudo-continuous variation is performed by performing any one or a combination of a plurality of operations among the display of the effect image, the output of the special sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the operation of the movable member. You may make it alert | report so that it can recognize.

  During the decorative symbol variation display, different from the reach or specific representation, for example, a predetermined character image or message image is displayed after all symbol variations have been started and before the decorative symbol variation display state has reached the reach display state. Depending on the display mode other than the decorative display variation display mode, such as the display of the display, etc., the decorative display variation display state may be a reach display state, or the variation display result may be a “big hit”. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that there is a certain event. Here, the notice effect for informing the player that the decorative display variation display state may become the reach display state is also referred to as “reach notice effect”. The effect operation as the notice effect may be performed (started) after all the symbol variations are started and before the decorative symbol variation display state becomes the reach display state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “line notice”, “monitor notice”, and “step-up notice” are set to be executable. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the display time of the special symbol depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect that becomes “Selif notice”, the decorative symbols are displayed on two or more decorative symbol display portions (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.) after all the symbol changes are started. Prior to the derivation display, a predetermined effect operation that is a button operation promotion effect is performed. The button operation promotion effect is an effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5. If it is. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED for lighting or blinking in a predetermined lighting pattern, moving a movable member provided in a play accessory provided inside or outside the game area 200 in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these It may be a combination of these. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is set. When an operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and a plurality of types of lines prepared in advance are stopped. Among them, an effect operation such as displaying a message image indicating one of the lines on the image display device 5 is executed. In addition, various effect operations, such as outputting predetermined sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, for example, may be performed as the effect operations for informing the lines.

  In the notice effect that is “monitor notice”, for example, a predetermined display on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed before the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on two or more decorative symbol display units after all the symbol variations are started. An effect image indicating a monitor is displayed at the position, and a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed. Even when the button operation promotion effect is performed in the notice effect that becomes the “monitor notice”, the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is also set. When an operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, and a plurality of types of characters prepared in advance are used. An effect operation such as displaying one of the effect images so as to appear in the monitor is performed. Various effect operations are performed such as displaying an effect image indicating a character or the like, displaying a message image notifying a message from the character, or outputting a predetermined sound notifying the message from the speakers 8L and 8R. May be.

  In the notice effect that is “step-up notice”, for example, the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed before the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the two or more decorative symbol display units after all the symbol variations are started. At a predetermined position, there may be an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order. In addition, after one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is initially displayed in a predetermined order) is displayed in the notification effect that is a “step-up notice”, The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without switching the effect image.

  If the special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game that corresponds to the change display result being “losing”, the decoration of “left”, “middle”, and “right” Among the symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. After the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display state in some decorative design display parts, the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect is completed, the reach lose combination (the combination of the lost design and the reach during the variable display) There is a case where a definite decorative symbol that is a symbol combination) is derived and displayed. Such a decorative pattern variation display result is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variation display result is “losing”.

  If the special symbol that will be a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game that corresponds to the variation display result being “losing”, the “left”, “ Reach the decorative symbols in some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5R, etc.) After derivation and display in a non-reach display state different from the display state, a determined decorative design that becomes one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 as shown in FIG. There is a case where a definite decorative symbol which is a non-reach combination (a symbol combination which is a combination of lost symbols and which does not become a reach symbol combination during variable display) is derived and displayed. Such a decorative pattern variation display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “non-reach loss” or “normal loss”) variation display mode when the variation display result is “losing”.

  An effect operation prepared in advance as a mission start effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol whose final decorative symbol is one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8. For example, any mission start chance MC1 to MC8 may be derived and displayed when the mission start effect is started after the start of all symbol variations, or after the mission start effect is executed. It should be noted that when the mission start effect is started, the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner may be erased so that the confirmed decorative symbol is not derived and displayed after the mission start effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the variable display is continued, for example, by continuously performing the color symbol variable display in the color symbol display area even after the decorative symbol in the variable display is deleted. Good. In the mission start effect, an effect operation for presenting and notifying the player of the achievement condition of a certain mission (task) is performed. As an effect operation for presenting the achievement condition, for example, an effect image indicating the achievement condition is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a sound that allows the player to recognize the achievement condition is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A predetermined lamp or LED included in the game effect lamp 9 or the decoration LED is turned on to notify the achievement condition, and a movable member provided in an effect accessory provided in the game area 200 or outside the game area 200 is operated. What is necessary is just to notify achievement conditions by making it, or to show achievement conditions combining these either. The mission presented in this mission start effect is within a predetermined time (for example, any one of 1 minute, 3 minutes, and 5 minutes), and any of the predetermined decorative patterns (design numbers “1” to “8”) It is only necessary to be related to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as derivation display in the reach display state. This mission may be determined as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance when the mission start effect is executed. After the mission start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the mission mode is started.

  In the mission mode, the effect during the mission is performed until the achievement condition is satisfied or until the mission mode is terminated without the achievement condition being satisfied. For example, if the variation display result does not become “big hit” even if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied a plurality of times before the achievement condition is satisfied, a plurality of times corresponding to each start condition satisfied during the mission mode Production during the mission is performed over the fluctuation display. In the effect during the mission, the effect image that presents the achievement condition in an identifiable manner is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the display mode of the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5 is the display mode in the normal effect mode. The sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the variation display of the decoration pattern is different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED By making the pattern different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or by combining any of these, the effect operation may be performed in an effect mode different from the normal effect mode. When the variation display result is “big hit” during the mission mode, it is only necessary to be able to execute an effect that satisfies the achievement condition. It should be noted that depending on the presented mission, an effect that satisfies the achievement condition may not be executed even when the variation display result is “big hit” during the mission mode. In this way, the achievement condition presented as a mission is such that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” when it is satisfied, while the fluctuation display result can be “big hit” even when it does not hold. I just need it. When the achievement condition is not satisfied, the fluctuation display result does not become “big hit”, and the mission mode is completed, the normal effect mode may be returned.

  When a special symbol that is a 15-round jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, as with the variation display mode of “Leach Loss”, all symbol variations are started and “Left”, “ The reach effect may be executed after the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state in some of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “middle” and “right”. When the reach effect ends, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As an example, in response to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, the predetermined special symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol. A definite decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As another example, in response to the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, the confirmed special symbol becomes a special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probable big hit symbol A fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be derived and displayed, or a fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be derived and displayed. When the confirmed special symbol is a promising big hit symbol, after the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the big hit gaming state is started, the round in the big hit gaming state is being executed, or the big hit gaming state At the time of termination or the like, an effect operation for notifying that the state is controlled to a certain change state may be performed. Thus, when the reach effect is completed, the effect mode in the case where the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed is also referred to as all effect or complete effect.

  For example, the determined decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations have symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5, for example. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose design numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any decoration display unit 5L, 5C, 5R may be used as long as it can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are the probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any decoration display unit 5L, 5C, 5R may be used as long as it can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  Further, during the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probable variation jackpot combination, an effect operation that becomes a mission start effect may be executed. In this case, after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the mission achievement condition is presented by the effect operation that becomes the mission start effect. After that, for example, when the decorative symbol change display state becomes the reach display state, it becomes possible to recognize that the achievement condition has been established by, for example, entering the reach display state with the decorative symbol that matches the achievement condition presented as the mission. After reaching the notification, the reach effect is executed, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed. As an example, after starting all symbol variations, when a mission start effect is started, a decorative symbol that is one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 is derived and displayed, and then all symbols are revariated. Then, after the decorative design that matches the achievement condition is derived and displayed in the reach display state, after the reach effect is executed, the definite decorative combination of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed. As another example, after starting all the symbol variations, the mission start effect is performed and the achievement condition is presented without deriving and displaying the decorative symbol that is one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8. Then, after the decorative design that matches the achievement condition is derived and displayed in the reach display state, the definite decorative design of the jackpot combination may be derived and displayed after the reach effect is executed. In addition, by presenting any one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 as the mission achievement condition and deriving and displaying any of the presented mission start chances MC1 to MC8, the variation display result becomes “big hit” You may do it. In this case, after the mission start effect is executed following the start of all symbol changes, one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 that matches the achievement condition is derived and displayed, and the change is performed without executing the reach effect. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the display result became "big hit".

  Corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the fixed special symbol becomes the 15 round big hit symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination or the probable big hit combination is derived. After the display, etc., it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and after the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the time reduction state or the probability variation state. In this way, when the time reduction state or the probable change state occurs after the end of the 15 round big hit state, the effect mode may be different from the normal effect mode. For example, in the short time state after the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect image for informing that the short time state such as “chance time” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or the display screen of the image display device 5 The display mode of the background image may be different from the display mode in the normal performance mode, so that the short-time effect mode in which the player can recognize the short-time state may be set. Further, in the probability variation state after the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect image notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, or the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The display mode of the background image may be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, so that the effect mode during probability change in which the player can recognize the probability change state may be set.

  If a special symbol that is a two-round big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol for the special symbol game that corresponds to the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accurate”, all symbol fluctuations are displayed. After the start, a surprise mode start effect is executed as a surprise effect different from the full effect or the complete effect. Then, when starting the accuracy mode start effect or after executing the accuracy mode start effect, for example, a definite decorative symbol that becomes one of the accuracy chance items TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. 3C is derived and displayed. That's fine. It should be noted that, when the accompaniment mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner may be erased, and after the accuracy mode start effect is executed, the confirmed ornamental symbol may not be derived and displayed. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the variable display is continued, for example, by continuously performing the color symbol variable display in the color symbol display area even after the decorative symbol in the variable display is deleted. Good. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. In addition, as a surprise mode start effect, various effect operations may be executed in the same effect manner as the mission start effect. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode that is different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode is started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is performed during the variation display of the special symbol or the decoration symbol, and continues from the variation display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Without being in the state, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C may be stopped and displayed. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol, the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. The decorative display variable display mode that is displayed in a stopped state is used when a 15-round big hit is made. The random appearance 15 round jackpot is a 15 round jackpot that appears as if the control mode of the round executed for the first time is the control mode of the round in the odd jackpot game state.

  In response to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “accurate”, after the confirmed special symbol becomes the two round big hit symbol, the two round big hit state is controlled. After the completion, the control mode is controlled to the probability changing state, and the effect mode becomes the sudden accuracy mode. For example, in the surprise mode, an effect operation that allows the player to recognize that the state is in the probability change state may be performed in the same effect mode as the effect mode during probability change or in a different effect mode. In addition, when various types of performance operations are performed in the same manner as the mission start performance, the various modes of performance operations may be performed in the same manner as the mission mode in the accuracy mode. . In this case, the achievement condition is not satisfied, the fluctuation display result does not become “big hit”, and when the suddenness mode is ended, the production mode may be shifted to the normalization mode. You may make it return to presentation mode.

  In this embodiment, when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation”, all or completely There is a case where the production operation similar to the production is switched to the sudden production as the specific production different from the full production or the complete production. When the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. As an effect switching timing for switching to a sudden effect, for example, when a predetermined time (4000 milliseconds [ms], etc.) has elapsed since the start of all symbol changes (when all symbols are changing or when the left symbol is stopped), button operation is promoted When the operation button 30 is operated within the operation effective period when the effect is performed (when the button is operated), when the specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily Variations in decorative patterns, such as when stopped (when chances are stopped), and when re-variation is performed once to three times (during variation after re-variation) when the “pseudo-ream” specific performance is executed A plurality of timings before the display state becomes the reach display state may be determined in advance. Also, as the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect, for example, when the reach effect that becomes normal reach is being executed (during fluctuation after the reach is established), when the reach effect that becomes normal reach is changed to the reach effect that becomes super reach A plurality of timings after the change display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach display state, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed (at the time of super introduction effect) It only has to be defined. Here, at the time of super introduction production, when the introduction part in the reach production peculiar to the super reach is executed after the super development time in which the production mode changes after the reach production similar to the normal reach is performed, or It suffices if the introduction part in the reach production specific to the super reach is executed without performing the reach production similar to the normal reach. In addition, as the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect, for example, when the mission start effect is being executed (during the mission start effect), when the mission start effect is ended (when the mission start effect ends), the suddenness mode start effect A plurality of timings such as when a decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R during the execution of (when the right symbol is stopped) may be determined in advance.

  Note that all of these timings do not have to be predetermined as the effect switching timing, and any timing may be determined as the effect switching timing in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, timing other than these timings may be used as the effect switching timing to switch from the effect operation similar to the all effect or the complete effect to the sudden effect. For example, after a specific effect of “pseudo-run” is executed, the timing at which a non-reach combination decorative symbol is derived and displayed, or after the variable effect display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach display state, the reach effect is executed The production operation may be switched to the sudden production, for example, at the timing when the decorative design of the reach-losing combination is derived and displayed.

  When such a sudden effect is executed, the variation display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened compared to the case where the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed after the reach effect is completed. For example, the execution time of the sudden effect is determined in advance so as to be shorter (4000 milliseconds [ms], etc.) than the execution time of the reach effect that is executed with all effects or complete effects.

  When the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation”, the re-lottery effect may be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbols. In the re-drawing effect, the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 5. Later, for example, the decorative pattern display unit 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is changed again in a state where the same decorative pattern is aligned, and the decorative pattern that is a probable big hit combination, Any of the decorative symbols that become a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the big hit type is “normal”, as the re-lottery effect, after the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped is re-varied, The change promotion promotion effect is performed to derive and display the determined decorative pattern. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed in response to the jackpot type being “probable change”, the re-lottery effect is re-variable after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is re-variable. A changing promotion success effect that stops and displays a fixed decorative symbol that is a combination may be executed, or a changing promotion failure effect may be executed.

  When the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the fluctuation display result is stopped and displayed until the 15-round big hit state ends. A jackpot promotion effect may be executed as a notification effect on whether or not to control. Here, the timing of executing the jackpot promotion effect may be a period before the first round in the 15 round big hit state is started after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the change of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular. In addition, when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable variation”, if the definite decorative symbol combination that is a probable big hit combination is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the decorative symbol, the promotion effect during the big hit It should just be prevented from being executed.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and either the normal symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, an effect image indicating a roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters the “even” and displays the effect image of “sorry!” In the jackpot promotion failure production, while in the jackpot promotion promotion production, it is thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd” and the effect image “Probability!” Is displayed. When the big hit type is “probable change”, but the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed, the promotion will be in the probable change state by executing the promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit game state is finished. What is necessary is just to alert | report that there exists. If the big hit type is “normal”, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed until the big hit gaming state is ended, and notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state should not be performed. .

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. Further, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is equipped with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the presentation operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the turn-on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit and the like for driving are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. The main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 15, for example, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 may be provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is an effect control command transmitted / received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. FIG. 4A shows various effect control commands, and FIG. 4B shows an example of a display result notification command of the effect control commands. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change of the first special figure in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of change of the second special figure in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the special symbol variation display in the special game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command for specifying a change display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the result of prior determination as to whether the variable display result will be “lost” or “big hit”, and the variable display result will be “big hit”. Different EXT data corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the big hit type in the case is “first normal” to “fifth normal”, “first probability variation” to “sixth probability variation”, or “surprise probability” Is set.

  Specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variation display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “first normal” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “second normal” and the big hit type determination result. 8C03H is a fourth variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “third normal” and the big hit type determination result. 8C04H is a fifth variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth normal” and the big hit type determination result. 8C05H is a sixth variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result indicating that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fifth normal” and the big hit type determination result.

  Command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result notification command indicating a prior determination result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “first probability change”. The command 8C07H is an eighth change display result notification command indicating a prior determination result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “second certain change”. The command 8C08H is a ninth variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “third probability variation” and the big hit type determination result. Command 8C09H is a tenth variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability change”. The command 8C0AH is an eleventh variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fifth variation” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C0BH is a twelfth variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probable change”. The command 8C0CH is a thirteenth variation display result notification command indicating a prior determination result that the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” and the big hit type determination result.

  Here, the big hit whose jackpot type is “first normal big hit” (hereinafter also referred to as “first normal big hit”) is a big hit that is not controlled in the probabilistic state after the big hit gaming state, and is shown in FIG. As a round control in such a unit round, a big hit is controlled to a big hit gaming state in which a first winning mode is set to be a first opening mode in which a big winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds, and such a unit round is repeated up to 15 times. It is. The big hit with the big hit type of “first probability change” (hereinafter also referred to as “first probability change big hit”) is a big hit that is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. Thus, the big hit is controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the same control as the first normal big hit is performed.

  A big hit with a big hit type of “second normal big hit” (hereinafter also referred to as a second normal big hit) is a big hit that is not controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, and is a unit as shown in FIG. As the round control in the round, the first opening mode control state, which is the first opening mode in which the big winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds, is repeated up to a predetermined number of rounds, and then the winning is performed at 0.5 second intervals as the round control in the unit round. The jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the second opening mode control state, which is the second opening mode in which the mouth is opened for 0.5 seconds, is repeated until the final round (15 rounds). The big hit with the big hit type of “second probability change” (hereinafter also referred to as the second probability change big hit) is a big hit that is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. Thus, the big hit is controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the same control as the second normal big hit is performed.

  The big hit whose jackpot type is “third normal hit” (hereinafter, also referred to as “third normal big hit”) is a big hit that is not controlled in the promiscuous state after the big hit gaming state, and is a unit as shown in FIG. As the round control in the round, after repeating the first release mode control state, which is the first release mode in which the big prize opening is opened for 29.5 seconds, until the predetermined number of rounds, the second normal big hit and the second in the predetermined round Control is made to the third release mode control state in which the winning opening is repeatedly opened for 0.5 seconds at intervals of 0.5 seconds as in the case of the probable big hit, and thereafter, in the third normal big hit, the round in the unit round is again performed. As a control, it is controlled to a big hit game state in which the first release mode control state, which is the first release mode in which the big winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds, is repeated until the final round. Ride there. Also, the big hit whose jackpot type is “third probability change” (hereinafter also referred to as “third probability change big hit”) is a big hit that is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state, and is shown in FIG. Thus, the big hit is controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the same control as the third normal big hit is performed.

  The big hit with the big hit type of “fourth normal big hit” (hereinafter also referred to as a fourth normal big hit) is a big hit that is not controlled to the promiscuous state after the big hit gaming state, and is a unit as shown in FIG. As the round control in the round, after repeating the first release mode control state, which is the first release mode in which the grand prize opening is opened for 29.5 seconds, to a predetermined number of rounds, the interval time between rounds (for example, When the other round is 0.5 seconds, 1.5 seconds longer than that has elapsed, the second opening mode is to open the grand prize opening for 0.5 seconds as the round control in the unit round. The second release mode is the second release mode that is set to the open mode control state, and then the grand prize opening is opened for 0.5 seconds at 0.5 second intervals as round control in the unit round. It is a big hit, which is controlled to the jackpot gaming state to repeat the like control state until the final round. The big hit with the big hit type of “fourth probability change” (hereinafter also referred to as the fourth probability change big hit) is a big hit that is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state, and is shown in FIG. Thus, the big hit is controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the same control as the fourth normal big hit is performed.

  The big hit with the big hit type of “fifth normal big hit” (hereinafter also referred to as “fifth normal big hit”) is a big hit that is not controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, and is a unit as shown in FIG. As a round control in a round, after performing control for opening the winning prize opening for 29.5 seconds up to a predetermined number of rounds, the interval time between rounds (for example, other rounds are longer than other rounds) as in the case of the fourth normal big hit. When the time is 0.5 seconds longer than 1.5 seconds), the second opening mode control state that becomes the second opening mode in which the grand prize opening is opened for 0.5 seconds as the round control in the unit round. Then, as in the case of the third normal jackpot, the first opening mode in which the big winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds as the round control in the unit round again. It is a big hit for controlled release mode control state to the jackpot gaming state repeated until the final round. The big hit with the big hit type of “5th probability change” (hereinafter also referred to as the “fifth probability change big hit”) is a big hit that is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. Thus, the big hit is controlled to the big hit gaming state in which the same control as the fifth normal big hit is performed.

  A big hit with a big hit type of “Crush Profit” (hereinafter also referred to as “Crush Profit”) is a big hit that is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, and is a big prize as a round control in a unit round as shown in FIG. 67 described later. The jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the control for setting the second opening mode control state, which is the second opening mode for opening the mouth for 0.5 seconds, is performed up to a predetermined number of rounds (two rounds).

  The big hit with the big hit type of “sixth probable change” (hereinafter also referred to as “sixth probable big change”) is a big win that is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, and is executed for the first time as shown in FIG. In the same unit round, the second winning opening is opened for 29.0 seconds after the second opening manner control state, which is the second opening manner in which the winning opening is opened for 0.5 seconds, as the unit round to be performed. 4 Control is performed in the open mode control state, and then, as a round control in the unit round, the first open mode control state, which is the first open mode in which the big winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds, is repeated until the final round. A jackpot to be controlled. In such a sixth probability variation jackpot, the opening mode (opening for 0.5 seconds) in the unit round executed for the first time is pretending to be the same as the above-described opening mode for the stubborn jackpot, so the 15th round of stubbornness is shown. Also called jackpot.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stoppage of the decorative symbol variation display in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates the start of a big hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  Command A1XXH, corresponding to 15 open games in the 15 round big hit state, specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning port is open in each round. This is a medium specification command. Command A2XXH is an effect image (for example, an effect image in the interval between rounds) corresponding to 15 open games in the 15 rounds big hit state during the period when the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round. This is a designation command after opening the big prize opening for a 15-time open game designating display. In the special opening command for the 15th opening game, and the designation command after the opening of the special winning opening, different EXT corresponding to, for example, the number of rounds executed in the 15 round big hit state (for example, “1” to “15”). Data is set. In the 15 round big hit state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the grand prize opening is open in each round or the period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round. A continuous production operation may be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end specifying command for specifying the end of the big hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command and the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determining result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is open in each round corresponding to the two opening game in the two round big hit state. This is a medium specification command. Command A5XXH is for a two-open game that specifies the display of an effect image during a period when the big prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the two-open game in the two round big hit state This is a command specified after the grand prize opening. In the command for opening a special prize opening for a game that is opened twice or for a command designated after opening a special prize opening, for example, a different EXT corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” or “2”) in the two round big hit state. Data is set. In the 2 round big hit state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the grand prize opening is open in each round or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round. A continuous production operation may be executed.

  Command A4XXH opens the big prize opening in each round and variable winning action corresponding to the two-round big hit game based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for sudden use that designates display of the effect image during the period of the state. The command A5XXH is used to specify the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round or the variable winning operation corresponding to the two-round open game in the two round big hit state. This is a designation command after opening the big prize opening. In the command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening and the command after the opening of the big prize opening, a different EXT corresponding to the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big hit state (for example, “1” or “2”), for example. Data is set. In the 2 round big hit state, regardless of whether it is a period in which the grand prize opening is open in each round or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round. A continuous production operation may be executed.

  The command A6XXH is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the sudden appearance that specifies the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the big hit state of the 15th round. . Command A7XXH designates display of effect images (for example, effect images in the interval between rounds) during the period when the winning prize opening changes from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the sudden appearance 15 round big hit state This is a command to specify after the opening of the big winning opening for a masquerade. In the command for opening the winning prize opening for the masquerade masquerade and the command specifying after opening the ceremonial prize opening, for example, different EXTs corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 bonanza of the masquerade masquerade. Data is set.

  The command B001H is used to execute a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH is a total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the start winning memory display unit 5H provided in the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count. The reserved memory number notification command is transmitted, for example, in response to either the first start condition or the second start condition being met, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command. Subsequent to this, the main board 11 transmits to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number (eg, “1” to “8”) of start data stored in start data storage unit 151C. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received and the first special condition is received. The total number of stored hold data in the figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area; a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program; a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103; An input / output port (I / O) 105 is provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a reach, a variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the type and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated by the random number circuit 104 independently of the CPU 103, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is randomized by the CPU 103. It may be updated by software using The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. For example, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types such as “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprising probability” when the variation display result is “big hit”. It is a numerical value. For example, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR3 is a random value used for determining whether or not to change the decorative symbol variation display state to the reach display state when the variation display result is “lost”. For example, the reach determination random number MR3 takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used for determining the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type takes a value in the range of “1” to “241”. The random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “251”.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data respectively constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and setting tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation display pattern of decorative symbols. Table data and the like constituting the variable display pattern table are stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B displays the fluctuation display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 21 is off or on. Thus, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned so as to be associated with the jackpot determination value data or the loss determination value data. In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, the table data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is allocated to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. It is data for decision. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the probability variation flag is on, more random number values MR1 than when the probability variation flag is off, Allocated to jackpot decision data. As a result, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation flag is turned on, the probability that the variation display result is a “big hit” is higher than in the normal state or the short time state in which the probability variation flag is turned off. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state and the short time state when in the probability variation state The determination data is allocated to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 sets the jackpot types from “first normal” to “fifth” based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the big hit gaming state with the variation display result as “big hit”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “sixth probability variation”, and “surprising accuracy”.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 21 described later is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit types of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, “first probability variation” to “sixth probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. . Here, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “1” when the special figure game using the first special figure is started on the first special symbol display device 4A when the first start condition is satisfied. Thus, “2” is set when the second special symbol display device 4B starts the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or to control to the 2 round jackpot game state, or to control to the 15 round jackpot state This is data for determination that is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the random number value MR2 assigned to the jackpot type “first normal” to “fifth normal” or “first probability variation” to “sixth probability variation” is controlled to a 15-round jackpot state. While showing the determination result, the table data indicating the random value MR2 assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type indicates the determination result of controlling to the two round jackpot state.

  The table data indicating the random value MR2 assigned to the big hit types of “first normal” to “fifth normal” indicates a determination result that the control is not performed in the probability variation state, while “first probability variation” to The table data indicating the random value MR2 assigned to the jackpot type of “sixth probability variation” or “surprise probability” indicates the determination result that control is performed to the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 corresponds to the jackpot type determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, with the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) for setting to any of “0” to “11” is included.

  In the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, the random value for determining the big hit type for the big hit type of “surprise” depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. The assignment of MR2 is different. That is, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the value in the range of “83” to “100” among the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is allocated to the “big hit” big hit type, while the fluctuation If the special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is not assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied.

  8A to 8C show configuration examples of reach determination tables stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table 132A illustrated in FIG. 8A, a reach determination table 132B illustrated in FIG. 8B, and a reach determination table 132C illustrated in FIG. Are prepared in advance. Each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C determines whether or not to change the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state when it is determined that the variation display result is “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit game state. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR3. Each reach determination table 132A to 132C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 8D, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state, Selected as a usage table. In each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C, the reach determination random value MR3 is determined as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach. HC1-2 is associated with either a determination result indicating that the reach display state is not set or a determination result indicating the reach display state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. So that it is allocated.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 8A, “1” to “204” among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. Are assigned to the determination results of the non-reach HA 1-1, while values in the range of “205” to “239” are assigned to the determination results of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total number of pending storages is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR3 for reach determination. Range values are assigned to the non-reach HA1-2 decision results. Further, in response to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2”, “1”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination. A value in the range of “220” is allocated to the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1-1 of the reach determination random number MR3 corresponding to each of the case where the total reserved storage number is “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to each of the determination results of non-reach HA1-3, is allocated to the determination results of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. It is. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, any one of “1” to “3”), the variation display state of the decorative symbols is reach-displayed compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate at which the decision to enter the state is made is low. The average variation display time of special symbols and decorative patterns in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average variation display time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average fluctuation display time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In addition, the reach determination table 132B selected as the use table when in the probability variation state or the reach determination table 132C selected as the use table in the time reduction state is selected as the use table when in the normal state. Compared to the reach determination table 132A, a larger number of random values MR3 are allocated to the determination result indicating that the reach display state is not set. With such a setting, the probability that the decorative symbol variation display state is set to the reach display state is lower in the probability variation state or the short time state than in the normal state. In this way, it is possible to shorten the average variation display time when the variation display result is “lost” when the probability variation state or the short time state is compared with the normal state.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern type setting table 140 stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern type setting table 140 is composed of setting data and the like that determine the contents of a plurality of types of variation pattern types according to the variation display result and the variation display mode (in the case of “big hit”, the big hit type). In this embodiment, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4, variation pattern types CA1-4 and variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “non-reach”. CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3 and variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3 are prepared in advance. Further, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are prepared in advance as the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “reach”. Furthermore, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, or “first certain variation” to “fifth certain variation”. As types, a variation pattern type CA3-1 to a variation pattern type CA3-4 and a variation pattern type CA4-1 to a variation pattern type CA4-3 are prepared in advance. In addition, a variation pattern type CA5-1 and a variation pattern type CA5-2 are prepared in advance as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Furthermore, as the variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probability variation (surprise appearance probability variation big hit)”, variation pattern type CA6-1 and variation pattern type CA6-2 are: Prepared in advance. Each variation pattern type only needs to be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns along the content defined by the variation pattern type setting table 140. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the variation pattern type CA1-1, the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not shortened in the normal state, and the specific effect such as “pseudo-continuous” or the mission start effect is not executed. It is a variation pattern type of “no shortening (normal state)”, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (normal state)”. In the variation pattern type CA1-2, in the normal state, the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”. A variation pattern type of “hold 3 or 4 shortened (normal state)” in which a specific effect or a mission start effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “hold 3 or 4 shortened (normal state)” It consists of Fluctuation pattern types CA1-3 have a reduced display time of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is any of “5” to “8” in the normal state. ”Or the like, and a variation pattern type of“ hold 5-8 shortened (normal state) ”in which a specific effect such as“ ”is not executed, and a variation previously associated with“ hold 5-8 shortened (normal state) ” It is configured to include a pattern. The variation pattern type CA1-4 is a variation pattern type of “pseudo-run, mission start effect” in which a specific effect of “pseudo-run” and a mission start effect are executed when the change display mode is “non-reach” in a normal state. It is configured to include a variation pattern associated with “pseudo-run, mission start effect” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CB1-1 is a variation of “no shortening (probability variation state)” in which a specific effect such as “pseudo-run” or a mission start effect is not executed because the variation display time of the special symbol or decoration symbol is shortened in the probability variation state. It is a pattern type, and includes a variation pattern associated in advance with “no shortening (probability variation state)”. In the variation pattern type CB1-2, the variation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “8” in the probability variation state, It is a variation pattern type of “2-8 shortening (probability variation state)” in which a specific effect or a mission start effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “2-8 shortening (probability variation state)” It consists of The variation pattern type CB1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including quasi-continuous (probability variation state)” in which a specific effect of “pseudo-continuity” may be executed during decorative display variation display in the probability variation state. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “include (probability variation state)”.

  In the variation pattern type CC1-1, the variation display time of the special symbol or the decoration symbol is shortened in the time-short state, and the variation of “no shortening (time-short state)” in which the specific effect such as “pseudo-ream” or the mission start effect is not executed. It is a pattern type, and includes a variation pattern that is previously associated with “no shortening (time-short state)”. In the variation pattern type CC1-2, the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of stored memories is “2” to “8” in the short time state, It is a variation pattern type of “2-8 shortened (temporary state)” in which a specific effect or a mission start effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “2-8 shortened (temporal state)” It consists of The variation pattern type CC1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including pseudo-continuous (short-time state)” that may execute a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” during the display of the decorative symbols in the short-time state. It includes a variation pattern that is preliminarily associated with “include (time-short state)”.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is a variation pattern type of “normal reach” in which a normal reach production (normal reach) is performed after setting the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state, and is associated with “normal reach” in advance. Consists of fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern type CA2-2 is a variation pattern type of “super reach α” that executes a reach effect predetermined as a super reach α in the super reach after changing the decorative display variation display state to the reach display state. , And includes a variation pattern associated with “super reach α” in advance. The change pattern type CA2-3 executes the reach effect predetermined as the super reach β, which is different from the super reach α in the super reach after the change display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach display state. The variation pattern type of “reach β” includes a variation pattern associated with “super reach β” in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA3-1 executes a normal reach effect (normal reach) after setting the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state, and derives and displays a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination when the reach effect ends. It is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (no sudden production / no re-lottery)”, and includes a variation pattern associated in advance with “normal reach (no sudden production / no re-lottery)”. The variation pattern type CA3-2 executes a reach effect of either super reach α or super reach β after setting the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state, and when the reach effect ends, the jackpot combination Is a variation pattern type of “super reach (no sudden production / no re-lottery)” for deriving and displaying a fixed decorative pattern of “. Consists of including. The variation pattern type CA3-3 executes a normal reach effect after setting the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state, and temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination when the reach effect ends. The variation pattern type of “normal reach (no sudden production / with re-lottery)” for executing the re-lottery production, including the variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (without sudden production / with re-lottery)” Is done. The variation pattern type CA3-4 executes a reach effect of either super reach α or super reach β after setting the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach display state, and is usually a big hit when the reach effect ends. This is a variation pattern type of “Super Reach (no sudden production / re-drawing)” that temporarily displays a combination decorative pattern and then executes a re-drawing production. “Super Reach (no sudden production / re-drawing)” ”And a variation pattern that is associated in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 executes the sudden effect during the decorative symbol variation display, and when the sudden effect is finished, the jackpot combination decorative symbol is derived or temporarily stopped. Is a variation pattern type of “sudden short” that has a relatively short period from the start to the effect switching timing to switch to the sudden effect, and includes a variation pattern that is associated with “sudden short” in advance. . As an example, in the variation pattern type CA4-1, the period from the start of all symbol variations based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition to the effect switching timing is less than 16000 milliseconds [ms]. A variation pattern is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a case where the sudden effect is executed during the decorative symbol variation display, and the big winning combination decorative symbol is derived or temporarily stopped when the sudden effect is ended. Is a variation pattern type of “sudden middle” in which the period from the start to the transition to the sudden transition effect is medium, and includes a variation pattern associated with “sudden middle” in advance. Yes. As an example, in the variation pattern type CA4-2, the period from the start of all symbol variations based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition to the effect switching timing is 16000 milliseconds [ms] or more. A variation pattern that is less than 36000 milliseconds [ms] is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-3 is a case where the sudden effect is executed during the decorative symbol variation display, and the big winning combination decorative symbol is derived or temporarily stopped when the sudden rendering is finished. Is a variation pattern type of “Sudden Long” that has a relatively long period from the start to the sudden transition effect switching timing, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “Sudden Long”. Yes. As an example, in the variation pattern type CA4-3, the period from the start of all symbol variations based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition to the effect switching timing is 36000 milliseconds [ms] or more. A variation pattern is included.

  The variation pattern type CA5-1 is a variation pattern type of “accuracy mode start effect” in which the accuracy mode start effect is executed without changing the decorative display variation display state to the reach display state. It includes a variation pattern associated in advance. The change pattern type CA5-2 executes the reach effect of the super reach α after changing the decorative symbol change display state to the reach display state, and shifts from the reach effect to the start / stop mode start effect. Variation pattern type of “via reach α”, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “probability mode start effect (via super reach α)”.

  The variation pattern type CA6-1 is a variation pattern type of “accuracy mode start effect” in which the accuracy mode start effect is executed without changing the decorative display variation display state to the reach display state, similarly to CA5-1. It is configured to include a variation pattern that is associated in advance with the “probability start effect”. As with CA5-2, the variation pattern type CA6-2 executes the reach effect of the super reach α after changing the decorative symbol variation display state to the reach display state, and shifts from the reach effect to the suddenness mode start effect. It is a variation pattern type of “accuracy mode start effect (via super reach α)”, and includes a variation pattern associated in advance with “accuracy mode start effect (via super reach α)”. Thus, the variation pattern type CA6-1 is set to the same variation pattern type as CA5-1, and the variation pattern type CA6-2 is set to the same variation pattern type as CA5-1. This is to make it difficult for the player to determine which of the “surprise” and “surprise” is a big hit even when the player sees the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern types shown above, variation pattern types such as CA1-4, CB1-3, and CC1-3 are provided that are non-reach, that is, variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous in a variation pattern that does not reach. ing. When such a variation pattern type is selected, when the reach pattern is not reached, the temporary pattern is temporarily stopped until the display result is derived and displayed after the variation display of the decoration symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. The effect of re-variation in which re-variation is performed once or a plurality of times for re-execution of variation display for all decorative symbols is performed by the effect control CPU 120. By performing such a re-variation effect, the range of the effect of the variable display can be expanded, so that the entertainment of the game based on the effect of the variable display can be further improved.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141A stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern setting table 141A is composed of setting data and the like for determining fluctuation display times and contents in a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the fluctuation display result is “losing”. The specific contents of the effect in the variation pattern are determined and set on the side of the effect control board 12 according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. In this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “non-reach”, variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-5, variation pattern PB1-1, A fluctuation pattern PB1-2, a fluctuation pattern PC1-1, and a fluctuation pattern PC1-2 are prepared in advance. Further, as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern PA2-1, the variation pattern PA2-2, the variation pattern PA3-1 to the variation pattern PA3-7. Are prepared in advance. The variation display result is “lost” as the variation pattern PA1-1 to variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PB1-1, variation pattern PB1-2, variation pattern PC1-1, variation pattern PC1-2. The variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where “is non-reach” is also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern (or “normal loss variation pattern”). Prepared when the variation display result is “lost” and the variation display mode is “reach”, such as variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PA3-1 to variation pattern PA3-7. The obtained variation pattern is also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern. A variation pattern prepared for a case where the variation display result is “lost”, such as a non-reach loss variation pattern or a reach loss variation pattern, is also referred to as a loss variation pattern.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141B stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern setting table 141B shows a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, or “first positive change” to “fifth positive change”. Of these, it is composed of setting data and the like for determining the variation display time and contents in a plurality of types of variation patterns that can be selected when the sudden effect is not executed. In this embodiment, the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, or “first positive change” to “fifth positive change”. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the sudden effect is not executed, variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PA4-2, variation pattern PA5-1 to variation pattern PA5-3, variation pattern PA6-1 to variation pattern PA6-5, A fluctuation pattern PA7-1, a fluctuation pattern PA7-2, a fluctuation pattern PA8-1 to a fluctuation pattern PA8-3, a fluctuation pattern PA9-1 to a fluctuation pattern PA9-5 are prepared in advance. Among these, the redrawing effect is not executed in the variation pattern PA4-1, the variation pattern PA4-2, the variation pattern PA5-1 to the variation pattern PA5-3, and the variation pattern PA6-1 to the variation pattern PA6-5. On the other hand, the redrawing effect is executed in the variation pattern PA7-1, the variation pattern PA7-2, the variation pattern PA8-1 to the variation pattern PA8-3, and the variation pattern PA9-1 to the variation pattern PA9-5. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect execution time is set to 10000 milliseconds [ms]. Variation pattern PA4-1, Variation pattern PA4-2, Variation pattern PA5-1 to Variation pattern PA5-3, Variation pattern PA6-1 to Variation pattern PA6-5, Variation pattern PA7-1, Variation pattern PA7-2, Variation pattern As in PA8-1 to variation pattern PA8-3 and variation pattern PA9-1 to variation pattern PA9-5, the variation display result is either “big hit” and the big hit type is “first normal” to “fifth normal”, Or, among the cases of “first probability variation” to “fifth probability variation”, the variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where the sudden effect is not executed is also referred to as an all effect jackpot variation pattern.

  FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141C stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern setting table 141C shows a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, or “first probability variation” to “fifth probability variation”. Of these, it is composed of setting data and the like for determining the variation display time and contents in a plurality of types of variation patterns that can be selected when the sudden effect is executed. In this embodiment, the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, or “first positive change” to “fifth positive change”. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the sudden effect is executed, variation pattern PT1-1 to variation pattern PT1-5, variation pattern PT2-1 to variation pattern PT2-7, variation pattern PT3-1 to variation pattern PT3-6. , Variation pattern PT4-1 to variation pattern PT4-5, variation pattern PT5-1 to variation pattern PT5-7, variation pattern PT6-1 to variation pattern PT6-6 are prepared in advance. Among these, the redrawing effect is not executed in the variation pattern PT1-1 to variation pattern PT1-5, variation pattern PT2-1 to variation pattern PT2-7, variation pattern PT3-1 to variation pattern PT3-6. On the other hand, in the variation pattern PT4-1 to variation pattern PT4-5, variation pattern PT5-1 to variation pattern PT5-7, variation pattern PT6-1 to variation pattern PT6-6, a re-lottery effect is executed. Variation pattern PT1-1 to variation pattern PT1-5, variation pattern PT2-1 to variation pattern PT2-7, variation pattern PT3-1 to variation pattern PT3-6, variation pattern PT4-1 to variation pattern PT4-5, variation pattern As in PT5-1 to variation pattern PT5-7 and variation pattern PT6-1 to variation pattern PT6-6, the variation display result is either “big hit” and the big hit type is “first normal” to “fifth normal” Or, among the cases of “first probability variation” to “fifth probability variation”, the variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where the sudden effect is executed is also referred to as a sudden big hit variation pattern. It should be noted that the change pattern PT2-7 and the change pattern PT3-1 shown in FIG. 12A are different in the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect, and accordingly, the change display time is set to be different. . Also, the change pattern PT5-7 and the change pattern PT6-1 shown in FIG. 12A have different effect switching timings for switching to the sudden effect, and accordingly, the change display time is also set to be different. .

  FIG. 12B shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141D stored in the ROM 101. The variation pattern setting table 141D is configured by data for setting that defines variation display times and contents in a plurality of types of variation patterns that can be selected when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Yes. In this embodiment, variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 are prepared in advance as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4 shown in FIG. 12 (B), after the suddenness mode start effect is finished, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes one of the suddenness chance items TC1 to TC4 is derived and displayed and stops. In the variation pattern PF1-1 to variation pattern PF1-4, the suddenness mode start effect may be performed after any one of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4 is temporarily stopped and displayed, or the suddenness mode start effect may be performed. The display of the decorative symbol may be erased when starting, and the fixed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. Like the variation pattern PF1-1 to variation pattern PF1-4, the variation pattern prepared corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” is also referred to as a sudden hit big variation pattern. Further, the variation patterns prepared for the case where the variation display result is “big hit”, such as the all-effects big hit variation pattern, the sudden big hit variation pattern, and the sudden hit big variation pattern, are also referred to as big hit variation patterns.

  FIG. 12C shows a configuration example of the variation pattern setting table 141E stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern setting table 141E is used for setting the fluctuation display time and contents in a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probable change”. It consists of data. In this embodiment, variation patterns PH1-1 to variation patterns PH1-4 are prepared in advance as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probability variation”. .

  In the variation pattern PH1-1 to variation pattern PH1-4 shown in FIG. 12C, as in the case of the variation pattern PF1-1 to variation pattern PF1-4, the probability chance items TC1 to TC1 after the suddenness mode start effect is finished. A confirmed decorative symbol that is one of TC4 is derived and displayed and stops. In the variation pattern PH1-1 to variation pattern PH1-4, the suddenness mode start effect may be performed after any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 is temporarily stopped, or the suddenness mode start effect may be performed. The display of the decorative symbol may be erased when starting, and the fixed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to easily determine which of the 15 round big hits and the sudden big hit is due to the difference in the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern PH1-1 is the same as the PF1-1 described above. Are similar to each other, the variation pattern PH1-2 is similar in content to the above-described PF1-2, and the variation pattern PH1-3 is similar in content to the above-described PF1-3. The combinations of the variation patterns PH1-1 and PF1-1, the variation patterns PH1-2 and PF1-2, and the variation patterns PH1-3 and PF1-3 may have the same variation pattern. The variation patterns may not be completely the same, for example, the timing of switching the contents of the variation pattern is different.

  FIGS. 13A to 13C show configuration examples of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table, a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A, a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. A non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 13C is prepared in advance. Each of the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C has a random display value for determining the variation pattern type when the variation display result is “lost” and the variation display mode is determined to be “non-reach”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on MR4. Whether each non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133A to 133C has a table selection setting as shown in FIG. 13D, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state Is selected as a use table.

  In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133A, for determining the variation pattern type depending on which of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 is the determination result that the variation display mode is “non-reach”. Are assigned so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4. The non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133B is for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result that the variation display mode is “non-reach” is non-reach HB1-1 or non-reach HB1-2. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CB1-1 to CB1-3. In the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133C, for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result that the variation display mode is “non-reach” is non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CC1-1 to CC1-3.

  FIGS. 14A to 14C show configuration examples of the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 134B shown in FIG. 14B, and the reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 134C shown in FIG. ) Reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134C is prepared in advance. The reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C each change the variation pattern type to the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “loss” and the variation display mode is “reach”. It is a table that is referred to for making a decision based on it. Each reach-losing variation pattern type determination table 134A to 134C is in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Accordingly, it is selected as a use table.

  In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is determined depending on which of the reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3 is the determination result indicating that the variation display mode is “reach”. Are allocated so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3. In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134B, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is represented by the variation pattern type CA2- in response to the determination result indicating that the variation display mode is “reach” is reach HB2-1. 1 to 5 so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-3. In the reach loss variation pattern type determination table 134C, in response to the determination result indicating that the variation display mode is “reach” is reach HC2-1, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA2−. 1 to 5 so as to be associated with any one of the variation pattern types CA2-3.

  FIGS. 15A to 15D, FIGS. 16A and 16B, and FIGS. 17A to 17H show configuration examples of the big hit variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, as the jackpot variation pattern type determination table, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15 (A), the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. 15 (B), and FIG. ) Big hit variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 15D, big hit variation pattern type determination table 135D shown in FIG. 15D, big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135E shown in FIG. 16A, and FIG. Jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135F shown in FIG. 17A, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 17A, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136B shown in FIG. 17B, and jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136B shown in FIG. Variation pattern type determination table 136C and jackpot variation shown in FIG. Turn type determination table 136D, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 137A shown in FIG. 17E, jackpot variation pattern type determination table 137B shown in FIG. 17F, and jackpot variation pattern type shown in FIG. A determination table 137C and a big hit variation pattern type determination table 137D shown in FIG. 17H are prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135F, 136A to 136D, and 137A to 137D respectively determine the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR4. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135F, 136A to 136D, and 137A to 137D, for example, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 17 (I), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, and The table is selected as a usage table according to whether it is in a short-time state, a variable special figure designation buffer value, or a jackpot type buffer value.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135E, and 135F, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is associated with one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4 and variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3. Is allocated as

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135C, 136C, and 137C, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is allocated so as to be associated with either the variation pattern type CA6-1 or the variation pattern type CA6-2. . In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135D, 136D, and 137D, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is allocated so as to be associated with either the variation pattern type CA5-1 or the variation pattern type CA5-2. .

  In the variation pattern type determination table 136A, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned so as to be associated with one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-4. In the variation pattern type determination tables 136B, 137A, and 137B, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4, variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern CA4-3. It is allocated so as to be associated with either one.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135E, and 135F, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is different so that the ratio determined to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 including the variation pattern for executing the sudden effect varies depending on whether It is assigned to each variation pattern type. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “0” to “2”, “221” to “241” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. Are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “3” to “5”, “211” to “2” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. The value in the range of “241” is allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “6” to “8”, “201” to “241” of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. Range values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3. With such a setting, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern in which the sudden effect is executed can be varied according to the total number of reserved memories. For example, according to the setting in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, the total number of reserved memories is “3” to “5” as compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is in the range of “0” to “2”. The sudden big hit fluctuation pattern can be selected at a higher rate when it is within the range or when the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “6” to “8”. It should be noted that the selection ratio of the sudden jackpot variation pattern is not limited to one that varies depending on the total number of reserved memories, and the selection ratio of the sudden jackpot variation pattern varies depending on the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number. In addition, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type may be assigned to each variation pattern type.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135E, and 135F, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. Depending on whether the determination ratio of the variation pattern type CA4-1, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type CA4-2, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern type CA4-3 are different. A random value MR4 is assigned to each variation pattern type. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “0” to “2”, only the value “221” is included in the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. While assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1, a value in the range of “222” to “226”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1, is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-2. Further, a value in the range of “227” to “241”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, is allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-3. On the other hand, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, if the total number of reserved storage is within the range of “6” to “8”, “201” to “201” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. The value in the range of “230” is allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-1, while the value in the range of “231” to “240”, which is smaller than the number of random number values allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-1, is the variation pattern type. Only the value “241” that is smaller than the number of random number values assigned to CA4-2 and further assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2 is allocated to the variation pattern type CA4-3. With such a setting, the average required time from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to the effect switching timing can be varied in accordance with the total number of reserved memories. For example, according to the setting in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, the total number of reserved memories is “6” to “8” as compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is in the range of “0” to “2”. In the case where it is within the range, the average required time until the effect switching timing can be shortened.

  The variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135E and 135F are determined so that the ratios determined for the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3 are different. Random number MR4 is assigned to each variation pattern type. As an example, if the total number of reserved memories is in the range of “0” to “2”, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135A, among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type, “221” to “241”. While the range values are allocated to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135E, the values in the range of “216” to “241” are the variation pattern types CA4. -1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 17I, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B may be selected as a use table when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”. On the other hand, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135E and 135F may be selected as a use table when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. With this setting, the special game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is executed, or the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is executed. Depending on whether or not it is done, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern can be varied. For example, according to the settings in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135E, compared to the case where the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is executed, The sudden big hit variation pattern can be selected at a higher rate when the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is executed.

  Note that the special game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is executed as compared to the case where the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is executed. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern type may be assigned to each variation pattern type so that the sudden big hit variation pattern is selected at a higher rate.

  In the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135E, 135F, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 136A, 136B, and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 137A, 137B, the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA4- The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to 3 is different. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A, even if the total number of reserved storages is in any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, “6” to “8”, The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to the variation pattern type CA4-3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 136A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is not allocated to any of the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 136B, “236” to “241” smaller than the number of random numbers assigned to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3 in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 137A and 137B, “200” to “241” which are larger than the number of random numbers assigned to the variation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3 in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 135A. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3. With such a setting, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern can be varied depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. For example, according to the settings in the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A, 136A, and 137A, the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern can be selected at a higher rate in the normal state than in the probabilistic state, The sudden big hit variation pattern can be selected only at a lower rate than in the state.

  As shown in FIG. 17I, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 136A shows that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable variation state, the big hit type buffer value is “ Any one of “0” to “4” is selected as a use table. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0” to “4” when the big hit type is determined from “normal 1” to “normal 5”. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 136A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is obtained for the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 including the sudden big hit variation pattern for executing the sudden effect. Not allocated. Therefore, when the game display state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, if the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal 1” to “normal 5”, the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern is not selected. The sudden effect is not executed. If the fluctuation display result is “big hit” when in the probable change state, if the big hit type is “probability change 1” to “probability change 6” or “surprise probability”, it is controlled to the probabilistic change state even after the end of the big hit game state. On the other hand, if the big hit type is “normal 1” to “normal 5”, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state, and the probability variation state is ended. Therefore, when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal 1” to “normal 5” in the probability variation state, the sudden big hit variation pattern is not selected and the sudden effect is produced in the probability variation state. When the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” after the execution of is finished, the probability changing state is further controlled. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of joy due to the sudden effect being executed in the probability variation state, and to increase the effect of the sudden effect.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the loss variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 18A and a loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 18B are prepared in advance as loss variation pattern determination tables. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B each determine whether or not to reach the reach display state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined not to control the big hit gaming state with the variation display result as “losing”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern based on the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, it is determined that one of the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-4, variation pattern type CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3, variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the result, and the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used according to a determination result indicating that one of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 is selected. Selected as.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, according to the variation pattern type, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern includes one or a plurality of variations with the variation display result as “losing” and the variation display mode as “non-reach”. Allocated to the pattern. In the loss variation pattern determination table 138B, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is allocated to a plurality of types of variation patterns having a variation display result of “lost” and a variation display mode of “reach” in accordance with the variation pattern type. It is.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, a change pattern PA1-4 such as the variation pattern type CA1-4, the variation pattern type CB1-3, or the variation pattern type CC1-3 is changed. A random pattern MR5 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern (see FIG. 10) in which a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” that performs variation once is executed. With such a setting, the variation pattern PA1-4 is selected corresponding to the determination result that the variation display result is “losing” and the determination result that the variation display mode is “non-reach”. The specific effects can be executed.

  For the variation pattern type CA1-4, in the non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type corresponds to the non-reach HA1-1. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is allocated, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is allocated corresponding to the non-reach HA1-2, and corresponding to the non-reach HA1-3. The values in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned, and the values in the range of “237” to “241” are assigned to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5, respectively. Yes. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 8A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total number of stored storage is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR3. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 132A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “1”, and the range of “1” to “217” in the random number MR3 for reach determination Value is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 132A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2”, and the range of “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination Value is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 132A, the total number of reserved memories corresponds to “3” and “4”, and among the random numbers MR3 for reach determination, “1” to “ A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 132A, the total reserved storage numbers correspond to “5” to “8”, and “1” to “ A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of stored storages is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower than when the total number of stored storages is “0”. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of “”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower.

  In the loss variation pattern setting table 141A shown in FIG. 10, the variation display time in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” and the mission start effect are not executed is 12000 milliseconds [ms], and in the variation pattern PA1-2. The fluctuation display time is set to 7000 milliseconds [ms], and the fluctuation display time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 is set to 5500 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the variation display time in the variation pattern PA1-4 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed is set to 24000 milliseconds [ms]. The variation display time in the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the mission start effect is executed is set to 32000 milliseconds [ms]. That is, when the variation display mode is “non-reach”, the variation display time in the variation pattern PA1-4 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, and the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the mission start effect is executed. The variation display time is longer than the variation display time in the variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect and the mission start effect are not executed. Then, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, it is determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect and the mission start effect as compared with the case of “0”. The ratio is low, and when the total number of reserved storages is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower than when the total number is “3” or less. . Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average fluctuation display time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 19, 20 </ b> A, 20 </ b> B, and 20 </ b> C show configuration examples of the jackpot variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 19, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 20 (A), and the big hit fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 20 (B). A determination table 139C and a big hit variation pattern determination table 139D shown in FIG. 20C are prepared in advance.

  Each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D has a variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type, etc., when it is decided to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result as “big hit”. Is a table that is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern. Each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the jackpot variation pattern determination table 139A is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that any one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to variation pattern types CA3-4, and the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4. -3B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of -3 is selected, and depending on the determination result indicating that either the variation pattern type CA5-1 or the variation pattern type CA5-2 is selected. The jackpot variation pattern determination table 139C is selected as the usage table, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table 139D is selected as the usage table according to the determination result indicating that either the variation pattern type CA6-1 or the variation pattern type CA6-2 is selected. . In each of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is allocated to a plurality of types of variation patterns whose variation display result is “big hit” according to the variation pattern type.

  In the setting of the big hit variation pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 20A, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 in the specific effect of “pseudo train” corresponding to the variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short”. A random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern PT1-4 and variation pattern PT4-4 that execute the sudden effect when the chance stop is displayed. Corresponding to the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, the variation pattern PT2-3 and variation pattern PT2−2 in which the sudden effect is executed after re-variation is performed once in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. 5, variation pattern PT5-3, variation pattern PT5-5, variation patterns PT2-7 and PT5-7 for executing sudden effects after re-variation is performed twice in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. A random number value MR5 for determination is assigned.

  Further, in response to the “sudden long” variation pattern type CA 4-3, the variation pattern PT 3-1 and the variation pattern PT 3-3 are executed after the re-variation is performed twice in the “pseudo-continuous” specific rendering. 3, fluctuation pattern PT3-5, fluctuation pattern PT6-1, fluctuation pattern PT6-3, fluctuation pattern PT6-5, and fluctuation in which the sudden effect is executed after re-change is performed three times in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect A random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern is allocated to the pattern PT3-4, the variation pattern PT3-6, the variation pattern PT6-4, and the variation pattern PT6-6. Accordingly, when the variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short” is determined, any of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped before the re-variation is started in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. There is only a possibility of switching to the sudden effect when displayed, and the sudden effect is not executed after the re-change. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle” or the variation pattern type CA4-3 of “sudden long” is determined, the re-variation is once in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. An abrupt effect may be executed after being performed three times. Further, in the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3, the allocation of the random value MR5 to the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is different from each other. Thereby, according to the timing when switching to the sudden effect is performed, the number of times of temporary stop display of any one of the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 in the specific effect of the “pseudo ream”, or the decorative pattern that has been displayed temporarily stop The number of times of re-variation can be varied.

  In such loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B and jackpot variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D, the variation pattern to which the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is assigned according to the variation pattern type is included in the variation pattern type. Fluctuation pattern. As an example, a variation pattern PA1-1 in which all random number values MR5 are allocated according to the variation pattern type CA1-1 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 18A is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1. The variation pattern is included. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B and the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D are based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the current variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected from the one or more types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type. This is a table for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. A data holding area 150 is provided.

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the game control data holding area. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 21 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are set as the pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening a game ball has won, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game ball is stored in association with the hold number according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S of FIG. 40 (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 15 executed for control and in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 41, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select and execute which process in the normal symbol process performed in S16 of FIG. 40 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20. I will tell you.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability variation flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability variation state, while being cleared to the off state in response to the probability variation state ending or the like. . The time reduction flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to an off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. .

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special symbol variation display time in the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The usual figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the usual figure game, such as a normal symbol fluctuation display time in the usual figure game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, and the like.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and each random number is randomly or irregularly set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) according to the increase or decrease of the second reserved memory number. Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total pending memory count is stored in the total pending memory count counter as the total pending memory count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction in response to an increase or decrease in the total pending memory count) )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating the initial count value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality (for example, “12”) of buffer areas, and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” corresponding to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the big hit type buffer, the big hit types when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” are a plurality of types such as “first normal” to “fifth normal”, “first positive change” to “normal six”, “surprise”. A buffer value corresponding to one of the determination results is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 7, for example, if the jackpot type is “first normal”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is “ If it is “first probability variation”, “5” is set to the big hit type buffer value, and “11” is set to the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type is “surprise”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. The provided RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the presentation control CPU 120 update numerical data indicating random values independently of each other. A random number circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring and the like for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal are connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, for temporary stop symbol determination before re-lottery Random number value SR2, random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, random value SR4 for determining notice pattern type, and randomness for determining first to third notice patterns Numerical data indicating each of the numerical values SR5-1 to SR5-3 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-3, SR4, SR5-1 to SR5-3. I just need it. The effect control CPU 120 uses various random counters different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-3, SR4, SR5-1 to SR5-3 may be counted. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3-1 to SR3-3, Numerical data indicating all of SR4, SR5-1 to SR5-3 may be counted.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are the variable display results of the ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”Is a random number value used for determining a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variation display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols before the re-lottery effect is executed when the re-lottery effect is executed. This is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the sections 5L, 5C, and 5R, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed on each of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo-simultaneous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice pattern types when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR5-1 to SR5-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used for determining any one of a plurality of types of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random number value SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect to be “serif notice”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random number SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to decide the notice pattern in the notice effect to be “monitor notice” and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number value SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to decide the notice pattern in the notice effect that becomes the “step-up notice”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  23A to 23D show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are tables for determining a fixed decorative symbol that is one of a predetermined non-reach combination and mission start chance items MC1 to MC8. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 160A includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. Is a table referred to in order to determine the value based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 160A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. . The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes a right final stop symbol FZ1-2, which is a finalized symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the second random number SR1-2 for determining the final stop symbol is It is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes medium final stop symbols FZ1-3 that are final ornament symbols that are stopped and displayed by the “medium” ornament symbol display unit 5C among the predetermined ornament symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determination based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  The ROM 121 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 24. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the left / right outcome type DC1-1 is LR0. , LR11 to LR18 and LR31 to LR38 are determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the random value SR1- for determining the third final stop symbol is determined according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. 3 is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, the second final stop is provided in a portion where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. The random number value SR1-2 for design determination is not allocated. With such a setting, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as a final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or jackpot combination (except for the chance of winning chances TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is a combination of predetermined decorative symbols. The random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A, the part that becomes the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 shown in FIG. A random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is included in the portion that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and further in the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Is not allocated. The combination of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 25 includes the same decorative symbols as, for example, pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, etc., and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, The decorative pattern is likely to be mistaken by the player as one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, the mission start chances MC1 to MC8, or the odd chance chances TC1 to TC4, such as the arrangement order of the decorative patterns in 5R is different. Contains combinations. With such a setting, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, a mission start chance item MC1 to MC8, or a random chance item. TC1 to TC4, and a certain non-reach combination similar to these chances can be avoided.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol displays when the mission start effect is executed during the variable symbol variation display with the variation display result “losing”. A chance to start a mission based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol for the combination of the final decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, FZ1-6 in the parts 5L, 5C, and 5R This table is referred to in order to determine one of the eyes MC1 to MC8. In the final stop symbol determination table 160D, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the mission start chance MC1 to MC8.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 162A includes a left final stop symbol FZ2-1 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L among the finalized decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations, and “ Reference is made to determine the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table to be. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the first random symbol SR1-1 for determining the final final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 (left and right final stop symbol FZ2). -1, FZ2-2) are assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a third final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is a final symbol that is stopped and displayed on the “medium” symbol display unit 5C among the final symbols that are reach-losing combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value SR1-3 for stop symbol determination.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variation display of the decorative symbols, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and “left” → “right” → “ In the case of deriving and displaying a finalized decorative symbol that is the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a predetermined order such as “middle”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C from which the decorative symbol is derived and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 derived and displayed on the decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to select “ The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a determined decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed on the “medium” decorative symbol display unit 5C is determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 162B, when the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PA2-1 or the variation pattern PA2-2, any of the variation pattern PA3-3 to the variation pattern PA3-3 is selected. , The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is a symbol difference “−2”, depending on each of the variation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-7. “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” are allocated.

  27A to 27C show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C are tables for determining a definite decorative symbol that is one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 163A is stopped and displayed together on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as fixed decorative symbols that are usually a big hit combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol are the same as the symbol numbers “1” of the normal symbols whose left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are the same. 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the left and middle symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as finalized symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ 1 ”,“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”, and“ 7 ”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C includes left center right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols to be one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163C, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the chances of success TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of a temporary stop symbol determination table used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. In this embodiment, a temporary stop symbol determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A is used as a temporary stop symbol determination table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. A temporary stop symbol determination table 164B shown in FIG. 28 (B) and a temporary stop symbol determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28 (C) are prepared in advance and stored in the ROM 121. As shown in FIG. 29, each temporary stop symbol determination table 164A to 164C includes a variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol based on the first start condition or the second start condition being established once. It is selected as a use table according to the number of fluctuations.

  In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A, in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, the first pseudo continuous time The random value SR3-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol is allocated to the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. Here, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A, when the same decorative symbol as the left final stop symbol is the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a decorative symbol different from the left final stop symbol is the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1. Compared to the case, a larger number of random values SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol are allocated. In such a setting, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 and the left final stop symbol among the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped when the final pseudo continuous variation is executed may be the same decorative symbol. Rise. As a result, the final pseudo continuous variation is executed, so that the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display portion 5L are not changed, while the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5C. The decorative design that is stopped and displayed on 5R is changed, and the impression that the variation display state approaches the reach state is given to the player by the continuous variation display of the decorative design, and the interest of the game is improved. it can. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A, when the left final stop symbol is a normal symbol such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 is “1”. , “3”, “5”, “7”, and so on, the pseudo-simultaneous chance symbols GC1, GC3, GC5, and GC7 that are probabilistic variation symbols are not determined. A numerical value SR3-1 is assigned. As a result, from the state where the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 becomes a probability variable symbol and becomes a probability variable big hit combination, the left final stop symbol becomes a normal symbol and there is no possibility of becoming a probability variable big hit combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation that the big hit type is “probable change” from being reduced.

  In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B, the combination of the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right stop symbol KZ2-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1. The random number SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3, depending on which of the two is GC8. Are assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 164C, the combination of the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B is a pseudo consecutive chance. Depending on which of GC1 to GC8, the random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is determined by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3. Allocated to the configured pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8.

  FIG. 30 shows a configuration example of the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery effect is started when the re-lottery effect is executed. ing. The temporary stop symbol determination table 165 may be stored in the ROM 121. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 165, the same left middle right that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination to be a big hit combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, The symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are allocated.

  FIG. 31 shows a configuration example of the notice pattern type determination table 166 stored in the ROM 121. The notice pattern type determination table 166 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect and to determine the notice pattern type in the case of executing the notice effect. In the advance notice pattern type determination table 166, according to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the random number value SR4 for determining the advance notice pattern type indicates that there is no advance effect or any of the advance notice pattern type CY1 to the advance notice pattern type CY3. It has been allocated. Here, the notice pattern type CY1 is a notice pattern type for executing a notice effect to be a “line notice”. The notice pattern type CY2 is a notice pattern type for executing a notice effect as a “monitor notice”. The notice pattern type CY3 is a notice pattern type for executing a notice effect as a “step-up notice”.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the allocation of the random number SR4 in the case of any one of the variation pattern PT1-1 and the variation pattern PT4-1 that executes the sudden effect during the variation of all symbols, the variation display result is “ It is the same allocation as when the variation display mode is “unreachable” and the variation pattern PA1-1, variation pattern PA1-2, variation pattern PB1-1, or variation pattern PC1-1 is “non-reach”. Yes. With such a setting, when the sudden effect is executed during the variation of all symbols, the variation pattern PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-2, the variation pattern PB1-1, and the variation pattern PC1-1 are used. The presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice pattern type can be determined at the same ratio.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the change pattern PT1-4, the change pattern PT2-3, the change pattern PT2-5, and the change pattern PT2-5 that execute the sudden effect after the re-change is performed once in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, When the random number SR4 is allocated to any one of the fluctuation pattern PT4-4, the fluctuation pattern PT5-3, and the fluctuation pattern PT5-5, the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode is “non-reach”. In the case of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the same allocation is performed. With such a setting, when the sudden effect is executed after the re-change is performed once in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”, the presence / absence of the notice effect at the same rate as in the case of the change pattern PA1-4. And a notice pattern type can be determined.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, any one of the fluctuation pattern PT2-1, the fluctuation pattern PT2-4, the fluctuation pattern PT5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PT5-4 that executes the sudden effect when the mission start effect is performed. When the allocation of the random number SR4 in a certain case is the variation pattern PA1-5 for executing the mission start effect when the variation display result is “loss” and the variation display mode is “non-reach”, the same allocation It has become. With this setting, when the sudden effect is executed when the mission start effect is performed, the presence / absence of the notice effect and the type of the notice pattern can be determined at the same rate as in the case of the variation pattern PA1-5. it can.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, after the reach display state of the normal reach is started after the variation display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach display state, the decorative symbol (the middle symbol displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C is displayed. ), When the random number SR4 is assigned to either the variation pattern PT2-2 or the variation pattern PT5-2 in which the sudden effect is executed during the variation, the variation display result is “lost” and the variation display mode is “reach” In this case, the allocation is the same as that of the variation pattern PA2-1 or the variation pattern PA2-2 for executing the reach effect of the normal reach. With such a setting, when the sudden effect is executed when the reach effect of normal reach is executed, the notice effect is produced at the same rate as that of either the change pattern PA2-1 or the change pattern PA2-2. Presence / absence and type of notice pattern can be determined.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the random number value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned only to the notice pattern type CY1 depending on the case of either the change pattern PT1-2 or the change pattern PT4-2. ing. With such a setting, when the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PT1-2 or the variation pattern PT4-2, the announcement pattern for executing the announcement effect that becomes the “line announcement” The type can be determined as CY1. In addition, in the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the random number value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned only to the notice pattern type CY2 in accordance with the case where the change pattern PT1-3 or the change pattern PT4-3 is set. Allocated. With such a setting, when the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is either the variation pattern PT1-3 or the variation pattern PT4-3, the advance notice pattern for executing the advance notice effect as the “monitor advance notice”. The type can be determined as CY2.

  In the setting of the notice pattern type determination table 166, the sudden effect is performed when the reflexion effect is performed after the re-variation is performed twice or more in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” or the reach effect of the super reach is performed. The variation in which the random effect SR4 is allocated in the same manner as in the case of any one of the variation pattern to be executed and the variation pattern in which the sudden effect is executed when the sudden effect start effect is performed, except for the sudden effect. The same allocation as in the case of the pattern (“other than the above” in FIG. 31). With such a setting, the effect mode until the sudden effect is executed is the same, and the presence or absence of the notice effect and the notice pattern type are determined at the same ratio for a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect. be able to.

  32 to 34 show configuration examples of the notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. FIG. In this embodiment, a notice pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. 32, a notice pattern determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33, and a notice pattern determination table 167C shown in FIG. Yes. The notice pattern determination table 167A is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns when the notice pattern type CY1 is determined. The notice pattern determination table 167B is a table that is referred to in order to decide one of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns when the notice pattern type CY2 is decided. The notice pattern determination table 167C is a table that is referred to in order to decide one of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns when the notice pattern type CY3 is decided.

  In this embodiment, the notice patterns YP1-1 to YP1-5 are prepared in advance as the notice patterns for executing the notice effect to be “serif notice”. In addition, notice patterns YP2-1 to YP2-5 are prepared in advance as the notice patterns for executing the notice effect to be “monitor notice”. Furthermore, the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 are prepared in advance as the notice patterns for executing the notice effect as the “step-up notice”.

  In the notice pattern determination table 167A, the random value SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is assigned to the notice pattern YP1-1 to the notice pattern YP1-5 according to the variation pattern. Further, in the notice pattern determination table 167A, when the notice effect by each notice pattern is executed, the possibility that the change display result will be “big hit” (the big hit reliability of the notice effect) is the lowest in the notice pattern YP1-1. The random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is set to the notice pattern YP1- so that the notice pattern YP1-2, the notice pattern YP1-3, the notice pattern YP1-4, and the notice pattern YP1-5 increase in this order. 1 to the notice pattern YP1-5. In the advance notice pattern determination table 167B, the random number value SR5-2 for determining the second advance notice pattern is allocated to the advance notice pattern YP2-1 to the advance notice pattern YP2-5 according to the variation pattern. In the notice pattern determination table 167B, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect is the lowest in the notice pattern YP2-1. Random value SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is assigned to notice pattern YP2-1 to notice pattern YP2-5 so as to increase in order. In the notice pattern determination table 167C, the random value SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is allocated to the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 according to the variation pattern. Further, in the notice pattern determination table 167C, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect is lowest in the notice pattern YP3-1 and increases in the order of the notice pattern YP3-2, the notice pattern YP3-3, and the notice pattern YP3-4. The random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is allocated to the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the allocation of the random value SR5-1 in the case of any one of the variation pattern PT1-1 and the variation pattern PT4-1 that executes the sudden effect during all symbol variations is the variation display result. The same allocation is made when the variation display mode is “losing” and the variation display mode is “non-reach”, ie, the variation pattern PA1-1, variation pattern PA1-2, variation pattern PB1-1, or variation pattern PC1-1. ing. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden effect is executed during all symbol variations, the variation pattern PA1-1, the variation pattern PA1-2, the variation pattern PB1-1, or the variation pattern PC1-1 is selected. Are determined to be either the notice pattern YP1-1 or the notice pattern YP1-2.

  With the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the fluctuation pattern PT1-4, the fluctuation pattern PT2-3, the fluctuation pattern PT2-5, the fluctuation pattern PT2-5 that execute the sudden effect after the re-fluctuation is performed once in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. When the random number SR5-1 is allocated in any of the pattern PT4-4, the variation pattern PT5-3, and the variation pattern PT5-5, the variation display result is “lost” and the variation display mode is “non-reach”. In this case, the allocation is the same as that in the case of the variation pattern PA1-4 for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden effect is executed after the re-change is performed once in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the notice pattern YP1 is the same rate as the case of the change pattern PA1-4. -1 and the notice pattern YP1-2.

  The setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A is any one of the fluctuation pattern PT2-1, the fluctuation pattern PT2-4, the fluctuation pattern PT5-1, and the fluctuation pattern PT5-4 that execute the sudden effect when the mission start effect is performed. In this case, the allocation of the random number SR5-1 is the same allocation as when the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “non-reach” and the variation pattern PA1-5 is for executing the mission start effect. It has become. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden start effect is executed when the mission start effect is performed, the notice pattern YP1-1 and the notice pattern YP1-2 are at the same rate as in the case of the variation pattern PA1-5. Decide on either.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, after the reach display state of the normal reach is started after the variation display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach display state, the decorative symbol (the middle symbol displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C) is displayed. When the random number SR5-1 is assigned to either the fluctuation pattern PT2-2 or the fluctuation pattern PT5-2 in which the sudden effect is executed during the fluctuation of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display result is “lost” and the fluctuation display mode is “reach” ", The allocation is the same as that of the variation pattern PA2-1 or the variation pattern PA2-2 that executes the reach effect of the normal reach. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the sudden effect is executed when the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the notice is given at the same rate as the case of either the change pattern PA2-1 or the change pattern PA2-2. The pattern YP1-2 is determined as one of the notice patterns YP1-4.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the random value SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is only the notice pattern YP1-1 depending on the case where it is either the change pattern PT1-2 or the change pattern PT4-2. Allocated to In the variation pattern PT1-2 and the variation pattern PT4-2, the operation effective period is set when the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 (see FIG. 36) in the notice pattern YP1-1 is performed, and the operation is performed within the operation effective period. Switching to the sudden effect is performed at the timing when the operation of the button 30 is detected. On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, when the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is finished, switching to the sudden effect is performed. In the variation pattern PT1-2, after the sudden effect is finished, the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, and then the definite decorative symbol derivation display is continued until the decorative symbol variation display time elapses. Further, in the variation pattern PT4-2, after the sudden effect is finished, the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is continued until the re-lottery effect is started.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the variation pattern PT2-6 and the variation pattern PT3- that execute the sudden effect at the time of super reach development in which the reach effect of the super reach α is started after the decorative display variation display mode is set to the reach display state. 5. Fluctuation pattern PT5-6, fluctuation pattern PT6-5, fluctuation pattern PT2-7 for executing the sudden effect during the third fluctuation after the second fluctuation is performed in the “pseudo-continuous” specific presentation and the fluctuation The variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach α when the allocation of the random number SR5-1 in the case of any of the patterns PT5-7 is “losing” and the variation display mode is “reach”. The allocation is the same as that of any of PA 3-1 to variation pattern PA 3-3. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, any one of the variation pattern PA3-1 to the variation pattern PA3-3 is performed when switching from an effect mode similar to the case where the reach effect of super reach α is executed to the sudden effect. Is determined to be one of the notice pattern YP1-2 to the notice pattern YP1-4 at the same rate as in the case of.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is changed to the reach display state, and then the introduction portion in the reach production of the super reach β is performed. PT3-6, fluctuation pattern PT6-2, fluctuation pattern PT6-6, fluctuation pattern PT3-1 for executing sudden effects after re-change is performed twice or more in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, fluctuation pattern PT3- 3. The allocation of the random value SR5-1 when the variation pattern PT3-4, the variation pattern PT6-1, the variation pattern PT6-3, or the variation pattern PT6-4 is any of the variation display results fluctuates with “lost”. When the display mode is “reach”, the fluctuation parameter for executing the reach effect of super reach β The allocation is the same as that of the turn PA3-4 to the variation pattern PA3-7. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, any one of the variation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-7 is performed when switching from the production mode similar to the case where the reach production of the super reach β is performed to the sudden production. Is determined to be one of the notice pattern YP1-2 to the notice pattern YP1-4 at the same rate as in the case of.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A, the allocation of the random number SR5-1 in the case of any one of the variation pattern PT1-5 and the variation pattern PT4-5 that executes the sudden effect when the surprise mode start effect is performed, In response to the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the fluctuation pattern PF1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PF1-4 for executing the surprise mode start effect is executed, and the fluctuation pattern The allocation is the same as that of any of PH1-1 to variation pattern PH1-4. In the setting example shown in FIG. 32, when the switching from the production mode similar to the case where the suddenness mode start production is executed to the sudden production is performed, it is one of the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4. And any one of the variation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-4 are determined to be any one of the announcement patterns YP1-1 to YP1-5.

  Even in the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167B, the effect form until the sudden effect is executed is the same, and for a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect, the random value SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used. Allocation is the same allocation. By such setting, the effect mode until the sudden effect is executed becomes the same, and a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect are in the same ratio with the notice pattern YP2-1 to the notice pattern YP2-5. Either can be determined. In addition, according to the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167B, the random value SR5-2 for determining the second notice pattern is changed to the notice pattern YP2- according to the case where it is either the change pattern PT1-3 or the change pattern PT4-3. Allocated only to 1. In the variation pattern PT1-3 and the variation pattern PT4-3, the operation effective period is set when the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 (see FIG. 36) in the notice pattern YP2-1 is performed, and the operation is performed within the operation effective period. Switching to the sudden effect is performed at the timing when the operation of the button 30 is detected. On the other hand, when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, when the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 is finished, switching to the sudden effect is performed. In the variation patterns PT1-3, after the decisive decoration symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed when the sudden effect is finished, the derivation display of the definite ornament symbol is continued until the variation display time of the ornament symbol elapses. Further, in the variation pattern PT4-3, after the sudden effect is completed, the fixed symbol combination of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed until the re-lottery effect is started.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C, among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type CA4-2 (see FIG. 9) of “sudden middle”, the variation pattern PT2-3, the variation pattern PT2-5, and the variation pattern PT2-7. , Variation pattern PT5-3, variation pattern PT5-5, variation pattern PT5-7, variation pattern PT3-1 to variation pattern PT3-included in variation pattern type CA4-3 of “suddenly long” 6. The random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern for each of the notice patterns YP3-1 to YP3-4 is assigned to each of the notice patterns YP3-1 to YP3-4 in the case of any one of the change patterns PT6-1 to PT6-6. Is different. Further, among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, the variation pattern PT2-1, the variation pattern PT2-2, and the variation pattern PT2-4, and “suddenly long” Even in the case of any one of the fluctuation pattern PT3-1 to the fluctuation pattern PT3-6 and the fluctuation pattern PT6-1 to the fluctuation pattern PT6-6 included in the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3, the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice The allocation of the random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern for the pattern YP3-4 is different. Then, the fluctuation pattern PT2-1 to PT2-7, the fluctuation pattern PT5-1 to the fluctuation pattern PT5-7 included in the fluctuation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, and the fluctuation pattern type CA4-3 of “suddenly long”. The change pattern PT3-1 to the change pattern PT3-6 and the change pattern PT6-1 to the change pattern PT6-6 included in FIG. Therefore, the ratio determined as one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 is made different depending on the timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed by the setting as the notice pattern determination table 167C. Can do.

  The pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 168A as shown in FIG. 35, a notice effect control pattern table 168B as shown in FIG. 36, a mission start effect control pattern table 168C as shown in FIG. Various production control pattern tables 168D as shown in FIG. 38 are included.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 168A, the variation display of the decorative symbols on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the period from when the decorative symbol variation display is started until the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as an operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, and an effect display operation in a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as a symbol variation control pattern. Each design variation control pattern includes, for example, various effects according to the variation display of the decorative design, such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series. The effect control CPU 120 reads the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command from the symbol variation control pattern table 168A. Then, by transmitting a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data to the display control unit 123, the control contents of the effect display operation such as the decorative pattern change display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5 are instructed. Further, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R is controlled by transmitting a sound effect signal corresponding to the sound control data to the sound control board 13 via the I / O 125 or the like. Further, the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is controlled by transmitting an illumination signal corresponding to the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 via the I / O 125 or the like.

  Of the symbol variation control patterns stored in symbol variation control pattern table 168A, symbol variation control pattern CPT1-2 corresponding to variation pattern PT1-2 and symbol variation control pattern CPT4-2 corresponding to variation pattern PT4-2. When the button operation promotion effect in the notice effect to be “line notice” is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation button 30 is entered, and the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. Effect display control data and the like are set so that the switch to the sudden effect is performed at the timing or when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period. . Then, in the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-2, after the decisive effect is ended, the definite ornament symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, and then the definite ornament symbol derivation display is continued until the variation symbol variation display time elapses. As described above, effect display control data and the like are set. Further, in the symbol variation control pattern CPT4-2, after the sudden effect is ended, the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is continued until the re-lottery effect is started. In addition, production display control data and the like are set.

  Of the symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A, the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-3 corresponding to the variation pattern PT1-3 and the symbol variation control pattern CPT4-3 corresponding to the variation pattern PT4-3. When the button operation promotion effect in the notice effect to be “monitor notice” is performed, it is an operation effective period in which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected effectively, and the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. Effect display control data and the like are set so that the switch to the sudden effect is performed at the timing or when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period. . In the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-3, after the sudden effect is finished, the definite ornament symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, and then the definite ornament symbol derivation display is continued until the variation symbol variation display time elapses. As described above, effect display control data and the like are set. Further, in the symbol variation control pattern CPT4-3, after the sudden effect is ended, the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped until the re-lottery effect is started. In addition, production display control data and the like are set.

  Note that a plurality of types of symbol variation control pattern table 168A may be provided corresponding to the presentation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As an example, a plurality of types of symbol variation control corresponding to each of the case where the production mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal production mode, a production mode during probability change, a production mode during time reduction, a mission mode, and a surprise mode. A pattern table 168A is provided. In this case, according to the presentation mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display mode of the background image, the display mode of the decorative design (display color, shape, size, character, variation speed, etc.), etc. are changed. Control data in the symbol variation control pattern stored in each symbol variation control pattern table 168A may be set in advance.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 168B, data indicating the control contents of various effect operations that become the notice effect, such as an effect display operation in the notice effect, for example, corresponding to each of the plurality of kinds of notice patterns. As long as a plurality of types are stored. Each notice effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations that become notice effects, such as an effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  The notice effect control pattern table 168B stores a notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 and a notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1, and corresponds to the notice pattern YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern CYP1-2-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-2-2 are stored, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-3-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-3- corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-3. 2 is stored, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-4-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-4-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-4, and the notice effect control pattern is corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-5. CYP1-5-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-5-2 are stored. The notice effect control pattern table 168B stores a notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 and a notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-1, and corresponds to the notice pattern YP2-2. The notice effect control pattern CYP2-2-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP2-2-2 are stored, and the notice effect control pattern CYP2-3-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP2- are associated with the notice pattern YP2-3. 3-2 is stored, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-4-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP2-4-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-4, and the notice effect corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-5. A control pattern CYP2-5-1 and a notice effect control pattern CYP2-5-2 are stored. Further, the notice effect control pattern table 168B stores notice effect control patterns CYP3-1 to CYP3-4 corresponding to each of the notice patterns YP3-1 to YP3-4.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 is a button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1. It consists of data for controlling the execution of BN1-1. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 includes data for setting an operation valid period during which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected effectively when the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period. It is out. The notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponds to the notice pattern YP1-1, and the line YN1- becomes an effect action for notifying the word when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation valid period. 1 is composed of data for controlling the execution of 1. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. .

  As another example, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 is a button operation that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-1. It consists of data for controlling the execution of the promotion effect BN2-1. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 includes data for setting an operation valid period during which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected effectively when the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 is executed. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-1 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period. It is out. The notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-2 displays an effect image indicating a predetermined character or the like in the monitor at the timing when the operation button 30 is detected within the operation valid period, corresponding to the notice pattern YP2-1 It is comprised from the data for controlling execution of monitor YN2-1 used as production | generation operations, such as making it display so that it may appear. Further, the notice effect control pattern CYP2-1-2 includes data for setting so that the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected as invalid after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period. .

  The notice effect control pattern CYP3-1 includes data for controlling the execution of step-up YN3-1, which is an effect operation such as displaying the effect image of the first step, corresponding to the notice pattern YP3-1. ing. Here, in the notice pattern YP3-1, after the step-up YN3-1 is executed, the notice effect is ended without switching the effect image (step-up image) in the notice effect. The notice effect control pattern CYP3-2 switches to step-up YN3-2, which is an effect operation such as displaying the effect image of the second step, following step-up YN3-1, corresponding to the notice pattern YP3-2. It is comprised from the data for controlling. The notice effect control pattern CYP3-3 corresponds to the notice pattern YP3-3, and is a step that becomes an effect operation such as displaying the effect image of the third step following the step-up YN3-1 and the step-up YN3-2. It consists of data for controlling to switch to UP YN3-3. The notice effect control pattern CYP3-4 corresponds to the notice pattern YP3-4, and after the step-up YN3-1 and step-up YN3-2, the effect of the third step is different from the step-up YN3-3. It consists of data for controlling to switch to step-up YN3-4, which is an effect operation such as displaying an image.

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C as shown in FIG. 34, the ratio determined as any one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 according to the timing when switching to the sudden effect is performed. It is different. The notice pattern YP3-1 and the notice pattern YP3-2 are different from the notice pattern YP3-3 and the notice pattern YP3-4 in the number of times of performing the action switching in the notice effect as the “step-up notice”. Yes. In addition, the notice pattern YP3-3 and the notice pattern YP3-4 have the same number of times of switching the effect operation in the notice effect, but the effect modes in the effect operation performed after the change are different. Therefore, according to the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C, according to the timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed, the determination ratio of the number of times that the effect operation is switched in the notice effect, or the effect in the effect operation performed after the change is performed. The determination ratio of the aspect can be varied.

  The mission start effect control pattern table 168C only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the mission start effect as the mission start effect control pattern. Each mission start effect control pattern includes, for example, a mission control effect timer notification value such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, and an end code. It is configured from control data for controlling various performance operations according to the contents, and the contents of various performance controls, switching timing of the performance control, and the like may be set in time series. The effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a fluctuation pattern PA1-5, a fluctuation pattern PA6-5, a fluctuation pattern PA9-5, a fluctuation pattern PT2-1, a fluctuation pattern PT2-4, In the case of a variation pattern for executing a mission start effect, such as when the pattern PT5-1 or the variation pattern PT5-4 is selected, the content of the mission to be notified by the mission start effect is determined, and the determination result is handled. The mission start effect control pattern is read from the mission start effect control pattern table 168C. Then, by transmitting commands and signals corresponding to various control data included in the mission start effect control pattern to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, control of the effect operation in the mission start effect is performed. The contents are instructed and the production operation is controlled.

  The various effect control pattern table 168D only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Each production control pattern corresponds to the progress of the production operation in the big hit gaming state, such as production control process timer setting value, production control process timer determination value, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and end code. The contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 39 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 39 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated in accordance with an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of the multiple types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command and the like from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as decorative pattern change display and effect display in reach effect by determining timing for switching effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Control for The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and the effect. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the control board 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be constituted by data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in a time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from the switches 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Following the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 and the like used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are possible. Enables setting of tilting movement of blades. In the normal symbol process, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state or in the short time state, the setting is made to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening as compared to the normal state. And control is performed. For example, when the state is the probability variation state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol variation display time in the regular symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the regular symbol variation display in each regular symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the result is “per normal” than in the normal state, and the tilt time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal”. Control for making it longer than that in the normal state, control for increasing the number of tilts compared with that in the normal state, or setting for performing any combination of these controls is performed.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing a command control process (S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing to the off state, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the number of prize balls based on the detection signal of the switch for detecting the winning in the winning area such as the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. Processing is executed (S18). Specifically, a payout control command (a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is displayed on a payout control microcomputer mounted on a payout control board (not shown) in response to detection of winning based on one of these switches being turned on. A prize ball number signal). The payout control microcomputer drives a ball payout device (not shown) in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls, and pays out the number of prize balls (game balls) indicated by the payout control command. When the winning ball processing is completed, the interrupt control is enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is ended.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S15 shown in FIG. 40 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S100). FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 42, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (S201; Yes), the first reserved storage number that is the number of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is obtained. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached (S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the first reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value (S203). . Then, from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (S204). Numerical value data indicating each random value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening prize designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first start opening prize designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 40 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the process of S206, the total pending storage number is incremented by 1, for example, by incrementing the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S207). Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (S208). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, settings for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed (S209). The reserved memory number notifying command set in this way follows the first start winning opening designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 40 after the special symbol process process is completed. 11 to the effect control board 12.

  When the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is OFF in S201 (S201; No), when the first reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), or After executing the processing of S209, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. (S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the OFF state (S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (S210; Yes), the second number which is the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (S211). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in S211 (S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value ( S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (S213). Numerical value data indicating each random value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening prize designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, settings for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to the effect control board 12 are performed. (S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 40 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the process of S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Then, the “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (S217). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (S218). The reserved memory number notifying command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 40 after the special symbol process process is completed. 11 to the effect control board 12. After executing the start winning determination process as described above, one of the processes of S110 to S117 shown in FIG. 41 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, a special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 151A and the second special symbol storage unit 151B. It is determined whether a first start condition for starting or a second start condition for starting the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol, etc. is controlled as the “big hit” to the big hit gaming state. A determination of whether or not is made. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the special symbol variation display result in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol (the jackpot symbol and the special symbol game in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”, the reach determination result of whether or not the variation display state of the decorative symbol is the reach display state, etc. A process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation processing includes a process for setting the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and after the special symbol starts variation display. The process etc. which measure the elapsed time of are included. It is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the fluctuation display time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the special symbol variation display result is stopped and displayed. A process for performing setting, a process for performing setting for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12, and the like are included. Note that the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is identified, and the elapsed time after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started is identified. When the display time is reached, it is possible to completely stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern to confirm the variable display result without receiving the effect control command from the main board 11. Further, in the special symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special chart process flag is set. Is updated to “4”. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the open state for the big winning opening based on the fact that the change display result is “big hit”, etc. Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of times the big prize opening is opened. As an example, when the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15 round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to.

  The special winning opening opening process of S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during opening of the big winning opening is based on processing for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. A process for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to a predetermined solenoid should just be performed.

  The post-opening process for the special winning opening in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, The process includes a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process of waiting until the waiting time elapses and a process of performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 43 (A), first, the CPU 103, for example, based on the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory. It is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number that is the total number is “0” (S241). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (S241; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (S242). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of S242, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved storage number count value, the total reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C is subordinate to the hold number “1”. The contents of the start data stored in the entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (S243). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in S242 is “first” or “second” (S244).

  If it is determined in S244 that the start data is “first” (S244; first), the first start to start the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. In response to the condition being satisfied, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (S245). On the other hand, if it is determined in S244 that the start data is “second” (S244; second), the second special symbol display device 4B starts the special figure game using the second special figure. Corresponding to the fact that the 2 start condition is satisfied, the variable figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (S246).

  After executing either of the processes of S245 and S246, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start data read in S242 (S247). For example, when the start data is “first”, as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a random value for determining the special figure display result The numerical data indicating MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out.

  Subsequent to the processing of S247, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start data is decremented by 1, and the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “2” is stored in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start data. ”To“ 8 ”), the stored content of the pending data is shifted up by one entry (S248). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory count value is decremented by 1, and the stored data stored in the first special figure reserved memory 151A is shifted up by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top.

  Following the processing of S248, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the start data is selected and set as a use table for determining whether the variation display result is “lost” or “big hit” ( S249). For example, if the start data is “first”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A is set as the use table, while if the start data is “second”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in B) is set as a use table. The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this manner, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in S247 matches the jackpot determination value data. It is determined whether or not (S250).

  If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit decision value data in S250 (S250; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S251). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S252). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read in S247, the jackpot type is set to “normal 1” to “normal 5” by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in S252. ”,“ Probability variation 1 ”to“ Probability variation 6 ”, and“ Sudden probability ”are determined as one of the big hit types (S253). When the special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of S246, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determining table 131. As a result, the jackpot type is not determined to be “surprising”. In the processing of S253, the jackpot type buffer value may be set to any one of “0” to “11” corresponding to the determined jackpot type.

  After the process of S253 is executed, the maximum value of the number of times of winning a prize opening is set (S254). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), if the jackpot type buffer value set in S253 is any one of “0” to “10”, the maximum value of the number of times that the big winning opening is opened is released 15 times. Set to “15” corresponding to the game. The jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” to “4” when the jackpot type determined in S253 is “normal 1” to “normal 5”, and the jackpot type determined in S253 is “ In the case of “probability 1” to “confirmation 6”, “5” to “10” are set. On the other hand, if the jackpot type buffer value set in S253 is “11”, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big prize opening is set to “2” corresponding to the twice-open game. The jackpot type buffer value is set to “11” when the jackpot type determined in S253 is “surprise”.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot decision value data in S250 (S250; No), after executing the processing of S254, whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state in advance or the jackpot Corresponding to the type determination result, a confirmed special symbol is set (S255). As an example, when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot decision value data in S250, the loss symbol corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “lost” becomes “−” The special symbol indicating the symbol “” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 matches the jackpot decision value data in S250, “1”, “3”, “ One of the special symbols indicating the number “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in S255, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S256), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in S241 (S241; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (S257), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (S261; Yes), whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state or a short-time state, a fluctuation special figure designation buffer value, and a big hit type Based on the buffer value, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 17 (I), as the use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135F, 136A to 136D, One of 137A to 137D is selected and set (S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is OFF in S261 (S261; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the table shown in FIG. According to the selection setting, one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not to change the decorative symbol display state to the reach display state (S263). At this time, the total reserved memory number is specified by, for example, reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S264). Subsequently, a random value MR3 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S265). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR3 extracted in S265, the presence / absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C set in S263 (S266).

  Subsequent to the processing of S266, it is determined whether the determination result in S266 is the change display mode of “reach” or “non-reach” (S267). At this time, if the determination result is that the change display mode is “reach” (S267; reach), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 14D, reach variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C are used as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types. Is selected and set (S268). On the other hand, when the determination result in S266 is a determination result in which the variation display mode is “non-reach” (S267; non-reach), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state. 13A to 13C are used tables for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. The non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIG.

  After executing any of the processes of S262, S268, and S269, for example, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S270). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in S270, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the use table set in any one of S262, S268, and S269. (S271). As an example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, FIGS. 16A and 16B, and FIGS. 17B, 17D, and 17E in S262. , 135E, 135F, 136B, 137A, 137B, the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type that does not execute the sudden effect based on the random value MR4 extracted in S270, etc. Either CA3-4 or a variation pattern type CA4-1 to execute a sudden effect can be determined. Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the presence or absence of the sudden effect is determined when the change pattern type is determined in S271. As another example, the jackpot variation pattern shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, FIGS. 16A and 16B, FIGS. 17A and 17B, and FIGS. When any one of the type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135E, 135F, 136A, 136B, 137A, and 137B is selected and set, “normal reach (no sudden effect / Fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 of "No re-lottery)", Fluctuation pattern type CA3-2 of "Super reach (no sudden effect / no re-lottery)", Fluctuation pattern of "Normal reach (No sudden effect / re-lottery)" The type may be determined as the type CA3-3, the variation pattern type CA3-4 of “super reach (no sudden production / re-draw)”, or the like. Thus, in this embodiment, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” and the sudden effect is not executed, when the variation pattern type is determined in S271, either the normal reach or the super reach is executed. Determination of whether or not to perform, determination of presence / absence of re-lottery effect, and the like are performed. Furthermore, as another example, when any one of the reach loss variation pattern type determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C is selected and set in S268, the random number value extracted in S270 Based on MR4 or the like, any one of “normal reach” variation pattern type CA2-1, “superreach α” variation pattern type CA2-2, and “superreach β” variation pattern type CA2-3 It is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variation display result is “loss” and the variation display mode is “reach”, when the variation pattern type is determined in S271, the normal reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are selected. Which reach production is to be executed is determined.

  Here, in the processing of S270 and S271, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition. Or the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied. Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processes of S270 and S271, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach display state in S266, the variation pattern is processed by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type. The type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of S271, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the change pattern type is determined in S271 in this way, FIGS. 18A and 18B are used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of change patterns based on the determination result of the change pattern type. And select one of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIG. 9 and the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D shown in FIGS. Set (S272). Subsequently, a random value MR5 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (S273). Then, based on the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern extracted in S273, the variation pattern determination table set in S272 is referred to determine which one of the plurality of types of variation patterns is selected ( S274). As an example, when one of the variation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-4 is determined in S271, the big hit variation pattern determination table 139A shown in FIG. 19 is selected and set in S272. If the variation pattern type CA3-2 is “super reach (no sudden effect / no redrawing)”, the variation pattern PA5-1 to variation pattern PA5-3 and variation pattern PA6-1 to variation pattern PA6-5 are selected. Any one is selected based on the random value MR5 in S274. If the variation pattern type CA3-4 is “super reach (no sudden production / re-draw)”, the variation pattern PA8-1 to variation pattern PA8-3 and variation pattern PA9-1 to variation pattern PA9-5 are included. Any one is selected based on the random value MR5 in S274. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type CA3-2 or the variation pattern type CA3-4 is determined, when the variation pattern is determined in S274, any one of the super reach α and the super reach β is selected. The determination of whether to execute the reach effect, the determination of the presence / absence of the specific effect as the “pseudo-run”, the determination of the number of times of the pseudo-run when executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-run”, etc. are performed.

  Here, in the processes of S273 and S274, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition is obtained. Regardless of whether or not to determine the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR5 used for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processes of S273 and S274, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach display state in S266, the variation pattern is generated by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. One of a plurality of types can be determined. As an example, in the process of S274, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Subsequent to the determination of the variation pattern in S274, the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (S275). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to start any of the above, a setting for starting the variable symbol display is performed (S276). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of S276 is executed, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the special symbol variation display (S277). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variation display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variation display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in S277 is performed, the main board 11 performs the first control on the effect control board 12 every time the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. One change start command or second change start command, change pattern designation command, and change display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in S277, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (S278), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 45, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (S292). For example, in the process of S292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing of S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (S293). For example, in the processing of S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. It only has to be stored. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (S294). In addition, settings for ending the probability change state and the time reduction state are performed (S295). For example, in S295, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to turn it off, processing for clearing the special figure variation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, etc. are executed. It only has to be done. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (S296), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  If the big hit flag is OFF in S291 (S291; No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation state or the time-short state is to be ended (S297). For example, in the process of S297, when the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated special figure change count value matches a predetermined special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special gaming state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated and controlled to the normal state by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of S297 may be ended. Note that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count count value is performed only when the hourly flag is on, and only when the hourly flag is on. Control may be continued until the result is “big hit”. Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like. Further, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state. After executing the process of S297, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “0”, and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pre-opening for opening the big prize opening executed in S114 of FIG. 46, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (S311). Here, the big hit start flag is set to an on state in response to the big hit flag being on in the special symbol stop process of S113 shown in FIG. If the big hit start time flag is ON in S311 (S311; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit start time production is on standby (S312). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of S113 shown in FIG. 41, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time is Set to the control process timer. In this case, in the process of S312, the game control process timer value is determined to be on standby for the big hit start effect in response to the predetermined standby time elapsed determination value (for example, “0”, etc.) not matching. Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the big hit start time production is not waiting.

  If it is waiting for the big hit start effect in S312 (S312; Yes), for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like (S313), and then the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big hit start effect in S292 (S312; No), the big hit start flag is cleared (S314) and the big prize opening number counter is cleared (S315). ), The jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (S316).

  Subsequently, an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value read in S316 is set (S317). FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting example of an opening control pattern and an opening setting example of a special winning opening. The setting of the opening control pattern in S317 is performed as follows, as shown in FIG. If the big hit type buffer value is “0” or “5”, the release control pattern of the release KP1 is set. If the big hit type buffer value is “10”, the release control pattern of release KP2 is set. If the big hit type buffer value is “11”, the release control pattern of release KP3 is set. If the big hit type buffer value is “1” or “6”, the release control pattern of the release KP4 is set. If the big hit type buffer value is “2” or “7”, the release control pattern of the release KP5 is set. If the big hit type buffer value is “3” or “8”, the release control pattern of the release KP6 is set. If the big hit type buffer value is “4” or “9”, the release control pattern of release KP5 is set.

  After executing the processing of S317, it is determined whether or not it is waiting until the next prize opening is opened in the next round (next waiting for opening) (S318). As an example, in the process of S318, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next release standby end determination value. It may be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next release in S318 (S318; Yes), the process proceeds to S313 and the game control process timer value is updated. It should be noted that the game control process timer value updated in S313 is the same as the time set in S292 shown in FIG. 45 as the big hit start waiting time, or in the post-opening process of S116 shown in FIG. It is a time set as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  If it is determined in S318 that it is not waiting for the next opening (S318; No), the special winning opening is opened corresponding to the opening control pattern set in S317 and the count value in the special winning opening number counter. Settings are made to do this (S319). As an example, in the process of S319, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big winning opening time is set in the game control process timer. The big winning opening opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for which is opened, is set. In addition, for example, when a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the big winning opening door solenoid for opening the big winning opening is turned on. Setting to be in the state is performed.

  In S319, for example, setting for opening the special winning opening is performed as follows. Referring to FIG. 47B, when the opening control pattern of opening KP1 is set in S317, the first normal big hit or the first positive variation big hit is set, and the count value in the big winning opening opening number counter is “1”. In any case of “15”, the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special winning opening opening time.

  When the opening control pattern of the opening KP2 is set in S317, it is the sixth probability variation big hit (abrupt appearance), and when the count value in the big prize opening number counter is “1”, the big prize opening time is 30. A timer initial value corresponding to 0 seconds is set in the game control process timer. When the count value in the large winning opening opening number counter in the opening control pattern of the opening KP2 is “1”, that is, in the first round, the opening operation is performed for 0.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time. After that, the opening operation for 29.0 seconds is performed as the opening time of the big prize opening through the closing time of 0.5 seconds.

  When the opening control pattern of the opening KP3 is set in S317, it is insidious, and when the count value in the big prize opening number counter is “1” or “2”, the big prize opening time is 0. A timer initial value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the game control process timer.

  When the opening control pattern of the opening KP4 is set in S317, it is the second normal big hit or the second probability variation big hit, and the count value in the big prize winning opening number counter is any of “1” to “7” A timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special winning opening opening time. When the count value in the special prize opening number counter is any of “8” to “15”, a timer initial value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special prize opening time. Is done.

  When the opening control pattern of the opening KP5 is set in S317, it is the third normal big hit or the third probability variation big hit, and the count values in the big winning opening opening number counter are “1” to “7”, “9” to “9”. When the value is “15”, a timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special winning opening opening time. When the count value in the special prize opening number counter is “8”, a timer initial value corresponding to 0.5 seconds as the special prize opening time is set in the game control process timer. When the count value in the big winning opening opening number counter in the opening control pattern of the opening KP5 is “8”, that is, in the eighth round, the opening operation for 0.5 second is performed as the big winning opening opening time. A total of 8 times, each with a 0.5 second closure time.

  When the opening control pattern of the opening KP6 is set in S317, it is the fourth normal big hit or the fourth probability variation big hit, and the count value in the big winning opening opening number counter is any of “1” to “7” A timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special winning opening opening time. When the count value in the special prize opening number counter is “8”, a timer initial value corresponding to 0.5 seconds as the special prize opening time is set in the game control process timer. When the count value in the big winning opening opening number counter in the opening control pattern of the opening KP5 is “8”, that is, in the eighth round, the opening operation for 0.5 second is performed as the big winning opening opening time. When a long inter-round interval time (e.g., 1.5 seconds longer when the other round is 0.5 seconds) elapses than the other rounds, Control for opening for 0.5 seconds is performed. When the count value in the special prize opening number counter is any of “9” to “15”, the timer initial value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special prize opening time. Is done.

  When the opening control pattern of the opening KP7 is set in S317, it is the fifth normal big hit or the fifth probability variation big hit, and the count value in the big winning opening opening number counter is “1” to “7”, “9” to “9”. When the value is “15”, a timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special winning opening opening time. When the count value in the special prize opening number counter is “8”, a timer initial value corresponding to 0.5 seconds as the special prize opening time is set in the game control process timer. When the count value in the big winning opening opening number counter in the opening control pattern of the opening KP5 is “8”, that is, in the eighth round, the opening operation for 0.5 second is performed as the big winning opening opening time. When a long inter-round interval time (e.g., 1.5 seconds longer when the other round is 0.5 seconds) elapses than the other rounds, Control for opening for 0.5 seconds is performed.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control board 12 (S320). After the process of S320 is executed, the special winning opening opening count value is updated by adding 1 or the like (S321), and the value of the special process flag is a value corresponding to the special winning opening being opened process. After updating to 5 ″ (S322), the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is terminated.

  FIGS. 48 and 49 are flowcharts showing an example of the special winning opening opening process executed in S115 of FIG. 48 and 49, in the process for opening the big winning opening, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Is determined (S331). If there is no game ball winning in the grand prize opening in S331 (S331; No), the process proceeds to S334.

  On the other hand, if there is a game ball winning in the big winning opening in S331 (S331; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it (S332). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (S333).

  When the winning number count value is a predetermined number in S333, the process for shifting to the post-opening process for the large winning opening is performed by executing S358 to S361 in FIG. 49 to close the large winning opening. It is. Specifically, in S358, for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid driving signal for a predetermined solenoid for a prize winning door via a prescribed solenoid circuit, a prize winning door for closing the prize winning opening is provided. The solenoid for setting is turned off (S358), and the winning number count value is cleared (S359). After executing the process of S359, the setting for transmitting the designation command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control board 12 is performed (S360), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after the big prize opening is opened. After updating to “6”, which is a value corresponding to the process (S361), the special winning opening open process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the winning number count value is not the predetermined number (S333; No), the game control process timer value is decremented by 1 and updated (S334), and then the release control pattern set in S317 is the release KP7. It is determined whether or not it is an opening control pattern (S335).

  If it is determined in S335 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP7, the process proceeds to S356 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S335 that the opening control pattern is not the opening KP7, it is determined whether or not the opening control pattern set in S317 is the opening control pattern of the opening KP5 (S336).

  If it is determined in S336 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP5, the process proceeds to S349 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S336 that the opening control pattern is not the opening KP5 opening control pattern, it is determined whether or not the opening control pattern set in S317 is the opening control pattern of opening KP4 or opening KP6 (S337).

  If it is determined in S337 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP4 or the opening KP6, the process proceeds to S348 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S337 that the open control pattern is not the open KP4 or open KP6, it is determined whether or not the open control pattern set in S317 is the open control pattern of the open KP3 (S338).

  When it is determined in S338 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP3, the process proceeds to S347 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S338 that the release control pattern is not the release control pattern for release KP3, it is determined whether or not the release control pattern set in S317 is the release control pattern for release KP2 (S339).

  If it is determined in S339 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP2, the process proceeds to S340 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S339 that the release control pattern is not the release KP2, that is, the release control pattern of the release KP1, for example, the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds. Whether or not 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening is determined in accordance with whether or not, etc. (S341). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (S347; No), the process for opening the special winning opening is terminated. On the other hand, when 29.5 seconds have elapsed (S341; Yes), by executing S358 to S361 in FIG. 49 described above, the big prize opening is closed and the process proceeds to the post-opening process for the big prize opening. Is performed. Thereby, the opening operation of the special winning opening is performed with the opening control pattern of the opening KP1 as shown in FIG. 47 (B).

  If it is determined in S339 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP2, it is determined in S340 whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is “1” (S340). If it is determined that the count value for the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is a value other than “1” (S340; No), the process proceeds to S341 described above, and 29.5 seconds elapses after the opening of the big prize opening. After waiting for the above, by executing S358 to S361 of FIG. 49 described above, the process for making the special winning opening closed and proceeding to the post special opening opening process is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S340 that the winning prize opening number count value is “1” (S340; Yes), for example, whether the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time (opening time) from the first opening of the special winning opening is 0.5 seconds (S342). At this time, if the elapsed time is 0.5 seconds (S342; Yes), for example, the output of the solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is stopped via a predetermined solenoid circuit, for example. Thus, a setting is made to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the large winning opening (S343).

  If it is determined in S342 that the elapsed time (opening time) since the first opening of the grand prize opening is 0.5 seconds (S342; No), for example, the game control process timer value is 1. Depending on whether or not the timer value corresponding to 0 second is met or not, whether or not the elapsed time (opening time) from the first opening of the big prize opening becomes 1.0 second That is, it is determined whether or not 0.5 second has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening (S344). At this time, if the elapsed time is 1.0 second (S344; Yes), it is assumed that 0.5 second has elapsed since the closing of the large winning opening, for example, a predetermined large winning opening door through a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, by starting the output of the solenoid drive signal for the solenoid for use, a setting is made to turn on the solenoid for the big prize opening door for opening the big prize opening (S345).

  If it is determined in S344 that the elapsed time since the first opening of the grand prize opening is 1.0 second (S344; No), for example, the game control process timer value is set to 30.0 seconds. Depending on whether or not the corresponding timer value is met, whether or not the elapsed time (opening time) from the first opening of the big prize opening becomes 30.0 seconds, that is, large It is determined whether or not 29.0 seconds have elapsed since the winning opening was opened again (S346). At this time, if the elapsed time is not 30.0 seconds (S346; No), the process for opening the big prize opening is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the elapsed time becomes 30.0 seconds (S346; Yes), the above-described S358 to S361 in FIG. Processing is performed. Thereby, the opening operation of the special winning opening is performed with the opening control pattern of the opening KP2 as shown in FIG.

  Also, if it is determined in S338 that the release control pattern is the release KP3, for example, depending on whether or not the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, etc. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time after opening the mouth is 0.5 seconds (S347). At this time, if the elapsed time is not 0.5 seconds (S347; No), the process for opening the special winning opening is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the elapsed time has reached 0.5 seconds (S347; Yes), the above-described S358 to S361 in FIG. Processing is performed. Thereby, the opening operation of the special winning opening is performed with the opening control pattern of the opening KP3 as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in S337 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP4 or the opening KP6, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is any one of “1” to “7”. (S348). If it is determined that the winning prize opening count value is any one of “1” to “7” (S348; Yes), the process proceeds to S341 described above, and 29.5 after opening the winning prize opening. Waiting for the second to elapse, the above-described steps S358 to S361 in FIG. 49 are executed, so that the process for making the special winning opening closed and moving to the post-opening process for the special winning opening is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning prize opening number count value is not one of “1” to “7” (S348; No), that is, the winning prize opening number count value is “8” to “15”. If it is determined that the process is one of the above, the process proceeds to S347 described above, and waits for 0.5 seconds to elapse after the special winning opening is opened, and then executes S358 to S361 in FIG. As a result, the process for making the special winning opening close and shifting to the post-opening process for the special winning opening is performed.

  In this case, in the post-opening process for the special winning opening, for example, in the case of the opening control pattern of the opening KP4, an interval time between rounds of 0.5 seconds is set, and in the case of the opening control pattern of the opening KP6, 1. By setting the round interval time of 5 seconds, the opening operation of the big winning opening with the opening control pattern of the opening KP4 or the opening control pattern of the opening KP6 as shown in FIG. An opening operation is performed. That is, the release control pattern of release KP4 and the release control pattern of release KP6 have the same number of releases and release times in each unit round from the first round to the 15th round, and round interval times before and after the eighth round. Is longer than the opening control pattern of the opening KP4, so that the processing contents in the process during the opening of the big winning opening are the same, and if the interval time between rounds is different in the processing after the opening of the big winning opening, these opening control patterns It is possible to realize the opening operation of the big prize opening at. In addition, regarding the opening control pattern of the opening KP4 and the opening control pattern of the opening KP6, the processing contents in the special winning opening opening process may be divided into different processing steps.

  If it is determined in S336 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP5, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is any one of “1” to “7” (S349). . When it is determined that the number of times of winning the big winning opening is “1” to “7” (S349; Yes), the process proceeds to S341 described above, and 29.5 after opening the big winning opening. Waiting for the second to elapse, the above-described steps S358 to S361 in FIG. 49 are executed, so that the process for making the special winning opening closed and moving to the post-opening process for the special winning opening is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize winning opening count value is not one of “1” to “7” (S349; No), whether or not the winning prize opening count value is “8”. Is discriminated (S350).

  When it is determined in S350 that the winning prize opening number count value is not “8”, that is, when it is determined that the winning prize opening number count value is any of “9” to “15”, Proceeding to S347 described above, waiting for 0.5 seconds after opening the big prize opening, and executing the above-mentioned S358 to S361 in FIG. Processing for shifting to post-mouth opening post-processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S350 that the winning prize opening number count value is “8”, for example, the game control process timer value is 0.5 seconds, 1.5 seconds, 2.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds. , 4.5 seconds, 5.5 seconds, 6.5 seconds depending on whether the timer value corresponding to the closing timing (the closing timing from the first to the seventh time after opening the big prize opening) is met, etc. Then, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time after opening the grand prize winning opening is one of the closing timings at intervals of 1 second out of 0.5 seconds to 6.5 seconds (S347).

  When it is determined in S347 that the elapsed time is any closing timing, the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the large winning opening is turned off as in S343 described above. Is set (S352). On the other hand, when it is determined in S347 that the elapsed time is not any closing timing, for example, the game control process timer value is 1.0 second, 2.0 seconds, 3.0 seconds, 4.0. Depending on whether the timer value corresponding to the opening timing (second opening timing from the second winning opening to the eighth opening after opening the big prize opening) is met, etc. Then, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time after opening the grand prize winning opening is one of the opening timings at intervals of 1 second out of 1.0 seconds to 7.0 seconds (S353). .

  If it is determined in S353 that the elapsed time is any opening timing, the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on as in the case of S345 described above. Is set (S354). On the other hand, when it is determined in S353 that the elapsed time has not reached any opening timing, for example, when the game control process timer value is 7.5 seconds, the closing timing is 8th (after closing the big prize opening) It is determined whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big prize opening is a closing timing of 7.5 seconds, depending on whether or not the timer value corresponding to (timing) is met. (S355).

  In S355, when it is determined that the elapsed time is the closing timing of 7.5 seconds, the above-described S358 to S361 in FIG. Processing for shifting to post-opening processing is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S355 that the elapsed time is not the closing timing of 7.5 seconds, the process for opening the big prize opening is ended as it is. Thereby, the opening operation of the special winning opening is performed with the opening control pattern of the opening KP5 as shown in FIG. 47 (B).

  If it is determined in S335 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP7, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is any one of “1” to “7” (S356). . If it is determined that the number of times of opening of the big winning opening is “1” to “7” (S356; Yes), the process proceeds to S341 described above, and 29.5 after the big winning opening is opened. Waiting for the second to elapse, the above-described steps S358 to S361 in FIG. 49 are executed, so that the process for making the special winning opening closed and moving to the post-opening process for the special winning opening is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize winning opening count value is not one of “1” to “7” (S356; No), whether or not the winning prize opening count value is “8”. Is discriminated (S357).

  If it is determined in S357 that the special winning opening opening count value is not “8”, that is, if it is determined that the special winning opening release count value is any of “9” to “15”, Proceeding to S341 described above, waiting for 29.5 seconds after opening the grand prize opening, and executing S358 to S361 in FIG. 49 to close the grand prize opening and making a big prize. Processing for shifting to post-mouth opening post-processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S357 that the value of the number of times of winning the big prize opening is “8”, the process proceeds to S347 described above, and waits for 0.5 seconds after the big prize opening is opened, By executing S358 to S361 in FIG. 49 described above, the process for making the special winning opening closed and shifting to the post special opening opening process is performed. Thereby, the opening operation of the special winning opening is performed with the opening control pattern of the opening KP7 as shown in FIG. 47 (B).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 50, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (S371). As an example, in the post-opening process of the big prize opening in S116 shown in FIG. Is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of S371, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value, What is necessary is just to determine whether the waiting time effect waiting time has passed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in S371 (S371; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in S371 (S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (S372). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in S372 is any one of “0” to “4” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (S373). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is any one of “0” to “4” (S373; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the time reduction state is performed (S374). As an example, in the processing of S374, the time reduction flag is set to the on state, and a count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state is set. It may be set in the special figure fluctuation frequency counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “0” to “4” in S373 (S373; No), the setting for starting the control to the probability variation state is performed (S375). As an example, in the process of S375, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and a predetermined initial count value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is a special diagram variation counter. Should be set to. In addition, when the control to be in the probable variation state is continued until the variation display result becomes “big hit”, the special figure variation number counter need not be set.

  After executing one of the processes of S374 and S375, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (S376), and then the jackpot end process ends.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 51 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is mounted on the effect control board 12. Register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed.

  Thereafter, random number update processing is executed (S402), and numerical data indicating random values counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is updated by software. To do. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is, for example, an interruption that occurs when an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined command reception interrupt process, for example, in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Take in. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in S403 (S403; No), the process returns to S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in S403 (S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (S404), and command analysis processing is executed (S405). In the command analysis process executed in S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the effect control command that has been made are performed.

  After the command analysis process is executed in S405, an effect control process process is executed (S406). In this effect control process, for example, effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined and set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  In the command analysis process of S405, when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the reserved memory display update for updating the reserved memory display in the start winning memory display unit 5H of the image display device 5 is performed. Processing may be performed. In this reserved memory display update process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is reception. At this time, if no pending storage number notification command is received, the pending storage display update process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a pending storage number notification command has been received, it is determined whether a decrease in the pending storage number is designated or an increase is designated by the pending storage number notification command. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control only needs to be able to specify the number of reserved memories based on the value of the variable display hold counter (variable display hold count value) provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. In this case, the pending storage count notified by the pending storage count notification command is compared with the variable display pending count value, and if the notified pending storage count is larger, it is determined that the increase in the pending storage count is designated. On the other hand, if the notified number of reserved memories is smaller, it may be determined that a decrease in the number of reserved memories is designated.

  Then, when a decrease in the number of reserved memories is designated, a hold display decrease update setting for updating the reserved memory display in the start winning memory display unit 5H is performed in response to the decrease in the number of reserved memories. In this hold display reduction update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are changed to the opaque color display in the start winning memory display unit 5H (for example, the leftmost display part among the display parts that are in the opaque color) The display setting for moving the display in each display part to the next one by one is performed. At this time, the display setting for returning one of the display parts that have changed to the predetermined opaque color display (for example, the rightmost display part of the display parts that have become opaque color) to the transparent color display is also performed. Done. Further, in the hold display decrease update setting, the variable display hold count value may be updated by 1. After performing such hold display reduction update setting, the hold storage display update process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an increase in the number of reserved memories is designated, it is determined whether or not any of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command has been received. To do. Here, it is determined whether or not the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command has been received in the command analysis processing of S405, and any of the start opening prize designation commands is received. If it is determined that there is, the command reception flag corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command may be set to the on state. As an example, when the first start opening prize designation command is received, the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is set to ON, while when the second start opening prize designation command is received, the second start opening prize designation command is set. Sets the specified command reception flag to the on state. In this case, if either the first start opening prize designation command reception flag or the second start opening prize designation command reception flag is on, it may be determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received.

  When it is determined that the start opening prize designation command has not been received, the start opening prize designation for updating the hold memory display in the starting prize storage display section 5H corresponding to the absence of the starting opening prize designation is not made. Display update settings are made. In the display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, blue display (display color corresponding to establishment of the first start condition) or red display (display corresponding to establishment of the second start condition) on the start prize storage display unit 5H. Display setting for changing all of the display parts that are colored) to gray display, and display for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display unit 5H to gray display Setting is performed. After such a display update setting when no start opening designation is specified, the on-hold storage display update process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received, the received start opening prize designation command is determined according to, for example, whether or not the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is on. It is determined whether or not it is a first start opening winning designation command. At this time, if it is determined that the command is the first start opening prize designation command, the first hold display for updating the hold memory display in the start prize memory display unit 5H corresponding to the increase in the first hold memory number. An incremental update setting is made. In this first hold display increase update setting, for example, the first start by the game ball entering one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage display update process ends. If it is determined that the command is the second start opening prize designation command, the second hold for updating the hold memory display in the start prize memory display area 5H corresponding to the increase in the second hold memory number. Display increase update setting is performed. In the second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage display update process ends.

  In this way, before receiving the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11, either the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command serving as the starting opening winning designation command is normally performed. 1st hold display increase update setting and 2nd hold display increase update setting are performed. At this time, in the start winning memory display unit 5H, the first reserved memory number that is the number of stored data in the first special figure storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition are established. The second reserved memory number that is the stored number of the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 notifies the increase of the reserved memory count, and becomes the start slot winning designation command before receiving the reserved memory count notification command. When neither the winning designation command nor the second starting opening winning designation command is received, the display update setting is performed when no starting opening winning designation is specified. At this time, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start winning storage display unit 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode. For example, when the display mode of the hold memory display is gray, the total hold memory number can be specified, but the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number can be displayed so that they cannot be specified. After that, when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, the first hold display increase update setting and the second hold display increase update setting are set. By performing either one, it is possible to add a new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command while maintaining the display mode in the display portion which is displayed in gray. As an example, when the reserved memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, the first hold display increase update setting is performed, so that the first start winning opening is won. A blue display corresponding to is added.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of S160 to S165, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. To do.

  The variation start waiting process in S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variation start waiting process is provided in the image display device 5 depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Whether or not to start the decorative display of the decorative symbols on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display units 5L, 5C, and 5R and the display of the variable of the color symbols in the color symbol display area A process for making a determination is included. At this time, if it is determined that the variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process of S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the above, in order to perform various presentation operations including the decorative display of the decorative design and the color design, the final decorative design, the temporary stop design, and the advance notice depending on the variation pattern and the display result The process etc. which determine a pattern etc. are included. The decorative symbol variation setting process includes a process for determining the presence / absence of the mission and the contents when the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing the mission start effect. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, a mission start effect control pattern, and the like are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process of S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, the symbol variation control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, the mission start effect, corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value). Processing for reading various control data from a control pattern or the like and performing various effect controls during the decorative display variation display is included. As an example, when the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 is set in the decorative symbol variation setting process of S161, it is included in the I / O 125 when the effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 reads the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 through the predetermined input port, and determines whether or not the operation detection signal is turned on within the operation effective period. Here, in the case where an item for executing a sudden effect such as the variation pattern PT1-2 or the variation pattern PT4-2 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the timing at which the operation detection signal is turned on within the operation valid period. Then, the production operation is switched to the sudden production. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that does not execute the sudden effect is designated, the notification effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 is controlled as the notification effect control when the operation detection signal is turned on within the operation effective period. By switching to the pattern CYP1-1-2, etc., the production operation is changed to the dialogue YN1-1. After such effect control is performed, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the result of the decorative symbol variation display is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if it does not depend on the production control command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine and display the variation display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decoration symbol variation end process in S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” when the variation display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the change display result being “lost”.

  The effect process during the big hit control in S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process of S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or a voice control board For example, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off / flashing by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a process for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is included. Further, in the ending effect process, setting for changing the effect mode may be performed in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability changing state or the time-saving state. For example, when the 15-round big hit state ends after the fluctuation display result of “normal” big hit type becomes “big hit”, the selection setting of the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 168A is changed so that the effect mode is reduced to a short time. By doing so, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed. Also, when the 15-round big hit state ends after the fluctuation display result for the “big change” big hit type becomes “big hit”, the selection setting of the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 168A is changed so that the effect mode during the probability change is set. By doing so, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed. Furthermore, when the 2nd round big hit state is ended after the variation display result is “big hit” in the “big hit” type of big hit, the selection setting of the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 168A is changed so that the sudden hit mode is set. Thus, the display mode of the background image and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in S161 of FIG. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a designation for executing the mission start effect from the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command (S501). As an example, in the process of S501, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PA6-5, variation pattern PA9-5, variation pattern PT2-1, variation pattern PT2-4, When it is either the variation pattern PT5-1 or the variation pattern PT5-4, it is determined that the mission start effect is designated.

  If a mission start effect is specified in S501 (S501; Yes), the presence or content of the mission and the content are determined (S502). As an example, in the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is already the mission mode. At this time, if it is already in the mission mode, it may be determined that there is no mission and the notification content of the mission is not changed or duplicated. Alternatively, even when already in the mission mode, another mission may be notified to determine to overlap the notification of the mission. Alternatively, when already in the mission mode, it may be determined to change to a mission different from the already-reported mission and change the notification content of the mission. If it is determined that there is no mission, the process of S502 is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a mission, the content of the mission to be notified is determined. At this time, according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, it may be determined to vary the content of the mission to be notified. For example, when the variation display result is the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the loss display result is “losing”, among the variation patterns in which the variation display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern PT2-1 and the variation pattern PT2- 4. If any of the variation pattern PT5-1 and the variation pattern PT5-4 is selected, any one of the mission contents corresponding to all the mission start effect control patterns shown in FIG. 37 may be selected. Good. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for mission determination from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 and refers to the mission determination table stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By doing so, the content of the mission can be determined.

  In addition, when the variation display result is one of the variation patterns PA6-5 and variation pattern PA9-5 in which the sudden effect is not executed among the variation patterns having the “big hit”, the variation display result is notified by the variation display result notification command. Depending on the jackpot type, different mission contents may be determined. For example, when the notified jackpot type is “normal”, any one of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” as the normal symbols is displayed. One of the missions including the reach display state according to the design is selected. On the other hand, when the notified jackpot type is “probable change”, any one of the mission contents corresponding to all the mission start effect control patterns may be selected.

  If the mission start effect is not designated in S501 (S501; No), or after executing the process of S502, the final stop symbol is determined (S503). As an example, in the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a non-reach loss variation pattern. At this time, if the non-reach loss variation pattern is designated, it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern PA1-5 is for executing the mission start effect.

  If the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern PA1-5, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 23A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 23B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 23C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the variation pattern PA1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 23D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1 that become one of the mission start chance MC1 to MC8 The combination of −5 and FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Thus, if it is a non-reach loss variation pattern other than the variation pattern PA1-5, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right outcome determination table 161, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1- 3 is determined so that the combination of the confirmed decorative pattern does not become the reach combination or the big hit combination, and even if the combination of the decorative designs other than the reach combination or the big hit combination is used, the pseudo continuous pattern shown in FIG. Chance items GC1 to GC8, mission start chance items MC1 to MC8 shown in FIG. 3B, sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. It will never be.

  As another example, in the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a reach-loss variation pattern. At this time, if the reach loss variation pattern is designated, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 26A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 26B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, when the reach loss variation pattern is designated, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display portion 5C from which the ornament symbol is finally derived and displayed. In addition, the decorative symbols to be the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are derived and displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” ornament symbol display portion 5C from which the ornament symbol is finally derived and displayed. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  As yet another example, in the process of S503, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4, which are sudden variation hit variation patterns, or the sudden appearance apparent hit variation. It is determined whether the pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-4, or the fluctuation patterns other than the sudden hit big fluctuation pattern and the sudden appearance big hit fluctuation pattern. At this time, if the suddenness big hit variation pattern or the sudden appearance big hit variation pattern is designated, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 27C is selected and set as the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. In addition, when a sudden big hit variation pattern or a sudden appearance big hit variation pattern is designated, a decorative design that becomes one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 or other non-reach lose combination is used as a finalized decorative design. It may be decided. In addition, when a surprise big hit variation pattern or a sudden appearance big hit variation pattern is designated, a decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination may be determined as a final ornament symbol.

  As described above, when the chance of winning the rush is the same as the chance of winning the 15th round of the rush, the selection ratio of the rush chances TC1 to TC4 is the same, and any of the rush chances TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed. Accordingly, the player can be prevented from easily grasping whether the big hit type is a sudden big hit or a fake fake 15 round big hit. It should be noted that the selection ratio of each of the odd chance chances TC1 to TC4 may be different depending on whether or not the big hit is a surprise big hit and the 15th round big hit. By doing so, it is possible to indicate to the player whether the big hit type is a sudden big hit or a fake 15 round big hit depending on which of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed. Become.

  When a variation pattern other than the sudden hit big variation pattern and the sudden appearance apparent big hit variation pattern is specified, depending on the big hit type notified by the fluctuation display result notification command, the fixed decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination, or the probability variation big hit The finalized decorative symbol to be combined is determined. At this time, when the notified jackpot type is “normal”, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 27A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. On the other hand, when the notified jackpot type is “probability change”, it is determined whether to use the normal jackpot combination or the probability change jackpot combination depending on whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect. Also good. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed after determining whether the normal big hit combination or the probability variation big hit combination. In this case, when the notified jackpot type is “probable change” and the determined decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is determined, it may be determined to execute the jackpot promotion effect. When determining the final decorative symbol for the normal jackpot combination, the final decorative symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 27A may be used to determine the final decorative symbol, as in the case where the jackpot type is “normal”. . When determining the definite decorative symbol for the probable big hit combination, the final stop symbol determining table 163B shown in FIG. 27B is selected and set as the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Further, in the process of S503, when the production mode is the mission mode, the confirmed decorative pattern may be determined by a procedure different from that in the production mode other than the mission mode. As an example, when the production mode is the mission mode and the reach loss variation pattern is specified, a definite decorative design is displayed so that a decorative design different from the decorative design notified as a mission is derived and displayed in the reach display state. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of. For example, when it is informed as a mission that the reach display state is indicated by the decorative symbol indicating the number “1”, the decorative symbols other than the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Next, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is determined. In this case, it is determined whether or not the decorative symbols to be the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A match the decorative symbols notified as the mission. If they match, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 may be changed by adding 1 or subtracting 1 to the symbol number of the determined decorative symbol.

  As another example, when the production mode is the mission mode, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” and the fluctuation display result is “big hit” without executing the sudden production, the mission is notified. The combination of the confirmed decorative symbols may be determined so that the same decorative symbol as the existing decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display state. Alternatively, the percentage of the decorative symbols that are notified as missions are derived and displayed in the reach display state is higher than the ratio that the decorative symbols that are notified as missions are derived and displayed in the reach display state. Alternatively, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols may be determined using a determination table in which random numbers are assigned to the decorative symbols. Note that when it is reported as a mission that any of the decorative symbols having the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” will be displayed and displayed in the reach display state. When the type is “normal” and the variable display result is “big hit”, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is selected so that the decorative symbols different from the decorative symbols reported as missions are derived and displayed in the reach display state. You may decide.

  After executing the process of S503, a temporary stop symbol is determined (S504). As an example, in the process of S504, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. If a variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-run” specific effect is designated, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R in the “pseudo-run” specific effect are specified. The combination of decorative symbols to be displayed in a temporary stop is determined for all of the above. At this time, the number of quasi-continuous re-variations corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variable M. For example, when the variation pattern PA1-4 shown in FIG. 10 is designated, “1” as the number of re-variations of pseudo-groups is set in the variable M. For example, in the variation pattern PT1-4, variation pattern PT2-5, variation pattern PT3-3, and the like shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols is stopped (temporarily stopped), the sudden effect is switched. Therefore, when these variation patterns are designated, the value of the variable M is not the number of re-variations of the pseudo-groups, but the number of times that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of the “pseudo-series” (pseudo-group temporary stop The number of display times) may be set.

  After setting the variable M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A shown in FIG. 28A is selected as the use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 164A serving as a use table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-1, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ2 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 are determined. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable M is “1”. At this time, if the value of the variable M is “1”, the determination of the decorative symbol to be displayed for temporary stop is completed.

  When the value of the variable M is other than “1”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B shown in FIG. 28B is selected as a use table after updating the value of the variable M to be subtracted by 1. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 164B serving as a use table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR3-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ3 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3 are determined. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable M is “1”. At this time, if the value of the variable M is “1”, the determination of the decorative symbol to be displayed for temporary stop is completed.

  Further, when the value of the variable M is other than “1”, the variable M is updated so that the value of the variable M is decremented by 1, and then the temporary stop symbol determination table 164C shown in FIG. 28C is selected as the use table. To do. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 164C serving as a use table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 are determined. At this time, the value of the variable M is always “1”, and the determination of the decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily is completed.

  As another example, in the process of S504, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing the re-lottery effect. If the variation pattern for executing the re-lottery effect is designated, the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is determined. At this time, for example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 shown in FIG. 30 is selected as the use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before re-lottery is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 that is a use table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7 that are usually the big hit combinations are used. -3 combinations are determined. Note that the decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottering effect is executed may be determined based on the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol determined in the process of S503. In this case, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the process of S503 is a normal jackpot combination, the decorative symbol identical to the confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be a decorative symbol that is temporarily displayed before the re-lottery effect is executed. That's fine. Further, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol determined in the processing of S503 is a probability variation big hit combination, a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily stopped from any normal symbol may be determined, and the confirmed decorative symbol is a symbol number. Ordinary symbols that differ by “1” may be determined as decorative symbols for temporary stop display.

  As yet another example, in the process of S504, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a sudden big hit variation pattern, even if the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, switching to the sudden effect is performed. It is determined whether or not this is a variation pattern that may temporarily display a decorative symbol before. For example, when any one of the variation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 shown in FIG. 12A is designated, the “left” decorative pattern is displayed before the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect. A decorative design may be derived and displayed on the display unit 5L. When the variation pattern PT2-1 shown in FIG. 12 (A) is designated, when executing the mission start effect, a decorative design that becomes one of the mission start chances MC1 to MC8 may be derived and displayed. . When any of the variation pattern PT2-2, variation pattern PT2-6, variation pattern PT3-2, variation pattern PT3-5, variation pattern PT3-6 shown in FIG. Before the effect switching timing to be switched, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the reach display state on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. When the variation pattern PT1-5 shown in FIG. 12 (A) is specified, a decorative pattern that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 may be derived and displayed when the surprise mode start effect is executed. . In such a case, in S504, it is determined that a variation pattern that may temporarily display a decorative symbol is designated before switching to a stunning effect. Then, the decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed before switching to the sudden effect is determined. At this time, the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop may be determined regardless of the final stop symbol determined in S503. Or you may make it determine a temporary stop symbol from the decoration symbols previously matched with the final stop symbol. As an example, in the case where the final stop symbol is a definitive ornament symbol combination consisting of ornament symbols indicating the number “7”, the ornament symbol indicating the number “7” on the “left” ornament symbol display portion 5L. Is determined to be temporarily stopped, or it is determined that the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed in the reach display state in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. do it. As another example, in the case where the final stop symbol is a definitive ornament symbol combination consisting of ornament symbols indicating the number “7”, the number “7” is indicated on the “left” ornament symbol display portion 5L. The ratio determined to display the decorative symbols temporarily may be higher than the ratio determined to display the decorative symbols other than the number “7” temporarily.

  After executing the process of S504, a notice setting process is executed (S505). FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice setting process executed in S505 of FIG. In the notice setting process, first, a notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. 31 is selected and set as a use table (S521). Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number SR4 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (S522). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 extracted in S522, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166, there is no notice effect according to the variation pattern, or the notice pattern type CY1 to the notice pattern type CY3. (S523). At this time, if it is determined that there is no notice effect (S524; Yes), the notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S523 that one of the notification pattern types CY1 to CY3 (S524; No), according to the determined notification pattern type, the notification pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. One of the notice pattern determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 34 is selected and set as a use table (S525). That is, when the notice pattern type CY1 is determined in S523, the notice pattern decision table 167A is set. When the notice pattern type CY2 is decided, the notice pattern decision table 167B is set, and the notice pattern type CY3 is set. If it is determined, the notice pattern determination table 167C is set. Thereafter, for example, a random value corresponding to the notice pattern type is selected from random numbers SR5-1 to SR5-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. The numerical data shown is extracted (S526). That is, when the notice pattern type CY1 is determined in S523, numerical data indicating the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern is extracted, and when the notice pattern type CY2 is determined, the second notice is obtained. Numerical data indicating the pattern determination random value SR5-2 is extracted, and if it is determined as the notice pattern type CY3, a random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is extracted.

  After extracting the numerical data indicating the random value in S526, referring to the use table set in S525 based on the numerical data indicating the random value, a plurality of types of notice patterns are selected according to the variation pattern. Either one is determined (S527). When the notice pattern is determined in this way, the notice setting process ends.

  After the notice setting process is executed in S505 shown in FIG. 53, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (S506). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A shown in FIG. Select or set as the usage pattern. At this time, when a plurality of types of symbol variation control pattern tables 168A are prepared in accordance with a plurality of performance modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1, they are stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A corresponding to the current performance mode. Any one of the symbol variation control patterns may be selected as a usage pattern. Thereby, even if it is the same variation pattern, for example, the production mode in the pachinko machine 1 is a plurality of production modes such as a normal production mode, a production mode during probability change, a production mode during a short time, a mission mode, and a surprise mode. The display mode of the background image, the display mode of the decorative pattern, and the like can be varied depending on which of

  Further, in the process of S506, any one of a plurality of types of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 168B shown in FIG. 36 corresponding to the notice pattern determined in S527 of FIG. Select and set as the usage pattern. In addition, in the process of S506, any one of a plurality of types of mission start effect control patterns stored in the mission start effect control pattern table 168C shown in FIG. Select or set as the usage pattern.

  Following the processing of S506, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in S506. (S507). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left”, “middle”, “right” provided in the image display device 5 are provided. The setting for starting the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 is started, such as starting the variation display of the decoration symbols in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (S508). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (S509), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 120 first updates (for example, subtracts 1) the effect control process timer value, for example, and then uses the updated effect control process timer value as a predetermined variation display time elapsed determination value. By comparing with (for example, “0”), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has passed (S541).

  When the variable display time has elapsed in S541 (S541; Yes), the decorative symbol stop command reception waiting time is set by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer (S542). Then, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decorative symbol variation (S543), the process during the decorative symbol variation is terminated.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in S541 (S541; No), for example, based on the effect control process timer value, the elapsed time since the start of variable display of the decorative symbol (or the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed) The production control is set in accordance with the remaining time until the operation is performed (S544). As an example, in the process of S544, by comparing the timer determination value indicated by various effect control patterns such as the symbol variation control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, and the mission start effect control pattern with the effect control process timer value, etc. Then, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met. If any timer determination value is matched, various control data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value is read. At this time, when the display control data is read, the display control command created according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123, and when the voice control data is read, When the sound effect signal created according to the sound control data is transmitted to the sound control board 13 and the lamp control data is read, the lighting signal created according to the lamp control data is sent to the lamp control board 14. It is only necessary to transmit it. In this way, after setting the effect control in S544, the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, subtracts 1), for example, and then determines whether the updated effect control process timer value has passed a predetermined command waiting time. It is determined whether or not the decorative symbol stop command reception waiting time has elapsed by comparing with a value (for example, “0”) (S551).

  If the decorative symbol stop command reception waiting time has not elapsed in S551 (S551; No), it is determined whether or not a decorative symbol stop command has been received (S552). At this time, if the decorative symbol stop command is not received (S552; No), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated. On the other hand, if a decorative symbol stop command is received (S552; Yes), for example, by supplying a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, the “left” provided in the image display device 5, A setting is made so that the decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed on all of the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variation display result of the decorative symbols is determined (S553).

  Following the processing of S553, it is determined whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” based on, for example, the variation display result notification command already transmitted from the main board 11 (S554). At this time, if the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (S554; Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the mission mode (S555). Here, the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified by the value of the effect mode buffer (effect mode buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. If the mission mode is set in S555 (S555; Yes), for example, the setting for ending the mission mode is performed by clearing the effect mode buffer (S556). If it is not the mission mode in S555, it is determined whether or not the effect mode in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the suddenness mode (S557).

  If the effect mode is the insidious mode in S557 (S557; Yes), for example, the effect mode buffer is cleared, and settings for ending the insidious mode are made (S558). When the production mode is not the suddenness mode in S557 (S557; No), or after executing any of the processes of S556 and S558, a predetermined timer initial value is set in the production control process timer, etc. The start designation command reception waiting time is set (S559). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during jackpot control (S560), and then the decorative symbol variation end process ends.

  If the fluctuation display result is “losing” instead of “big hit” in S554 (S554; No), it is determined whether or not the mission mode is started depending on whether or not the mission start effect is executed. (S561). At this time, if the mission mode is started (S561; Yes), for example, the setting for starting the mission mode is performed by updating the effect mode buffer value (S562). If the mission mode is not started in S561 (S561; No), it is determined whether or not the mission mode is ended (S563). Here, when the production mode is the mission mode, for example, a mission mode timer provided in the production control timer setting unit 192, for example, an elapsed time after the mission mode is started or until the mission mode is ended. The remaining time may be measured. In this case, in the process of S563, the value of the mission mode timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and then the updated timer value is compared with a mission end determination value (for example, “0”) corresponding to the mission content or the like. Thus, it may be determined whether or not the time limit for the notified mission has elapsed.

  When the mission mode is ended in S563 (S563; Yes), for example, the setting for ending the mission mode is performed by clearing the effect mode buffer (S564). If the mission mode does not end in S563 (S563; No), or after performing any of the processes in S562 and S564, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” (S565), The process at the end of symbol variation ends.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the effect control board 12, in response to receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, the effect control is performed based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. The CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in S508 of FIG. 53 and S544 of FIG. As a result, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5. Each variation pattern is assigned a time schedule that indicates how to change the decorative design according to the contents of the production. The variation display of the decorative design is for effect control according to the selected time schedule. It is executed by the cooperation of the CPU 120 and the display control unit 123. This time schedule may be determined in advance by, for example, effect display control data in the symbol variation control pattern stored corresponding to each variation pattern in the symbol variation control pattern table 168A shown in FIG.

  As an example, in the variation pattern PA1-1, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the variation of decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” ( All symbols change), left symbol deceleration stop, right symbol deceleration stop, middle symbol deceleration stop. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display section 5L (variable display, temporary stop display, complete stop display, etc.), and “middle symbol” is a “middle” ornament. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display unit 5R.

  That is, the first variation start command or the second variation start is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition for starting the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. A variation pattern designation command and the like are transmitted together with the command (S277 in FIG. 44). In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the time schedule shown in FIG. 57A in response to the first change start command or the second change start command. To do. At this time, in response to the designation of the variation pattern PA1-1 by the variation pattern designation command or the like, the final decorative symbol that is the non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol by the processing of S503 shown in FIG.

  As a result, first, decorative display of the decorative symbols on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R is started and the variation speed is accelerated. The design is changed at a constant speed (constant speed). After that, the display process of the left symbol deceleration stop and the right symbol deceleration stop is sequentially executed. At this time, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the non-reach display state in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R corresponding to the confirmed decorative symbols determined in S503 of FIG. Thereafter, a display process of decelerating and stopping the middle symbol is executed without executing the reach effect, and a fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is derived and displayed. On the main board 11, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 measures the elapsed time from the start of the variable display using a variable display timer or the like provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. The decorative symbol stop command may be transmitted when 12000 milliseconds [ms], which is the variable display time corresponding to PA1-1, has elapsed. Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop command is not transmitted from the main board 11, and the elapsed time from the start point of the variable display is measured on the effect control board 12, and the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern PA1-1 has elapsed. In addition, the display of the confirmed decorative design may be confirmed. In this manner, the effect control board 12 temporarily stops the non-reach combination confirmed symbol derived and displayed by, for example, decelerating and stopping the middle symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]) until the variable display time elapses. In response to receiving the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 or when the elapsed time measured on the side of the effect control board 12 reaches the variable display time, for example, for effect control As the CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123, etc., the final stop symbols are confirmed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display the decoration pattern completely stopped (confirm).

  FIG. 57 (B) shows a specific example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT1-1 for executing the sudden effect during the variation of all symbols. In this case, in response to the fact that the fluctuation pattern PT1-1 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, etc., the final decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is determined as the final stop symbol by the processing of S503 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 57 (B), after all symbols fluctuate and the left symbol decelerates and stops, at the timing when 4000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed from the start of all symbols fluctuate, The similar effect operation is switched to an unexpected effect different from the effect operation by the variation pattern PA1-1, and the unexpected effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms]. Then, for example, during the execution of the sudden effect, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol, and when the sudden effect is finished, it is stopped and displayed so that the player can recognize the confirmed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination. . For example, when 3500 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of the sudden effect, a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, and a predetermined time until the sudden effect ends (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]) It is only necessary to temporarily stop and display the determined decorative symbols that are derived and displayed.

  FIGS. 59A to 59F show an example of the effect operation by the variation pattern PT1-1. In the variation pattern PT1-1, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 59 (A) are started, and then the left symbol as shown in FIG. 59 (B) is decelerated and stopped. Subsequently, at the timing when 4000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of all symbol variations, the sudden effect is switched as shown in FIGS. 59 (C) to 59 (F). Then, when the sudden effect as shown in FIG. 59 (F) is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), in the variation pattern PT1-1 included in the sudden big hit variation pattern, the variation display time of the decorative symbol is shorter than the variation pattern PA1-1 included in the non-reach loss variation pattern. ing. In the variation pattern PT1-1, when a predetermined time such as 4000 milliseconds [ms] has elapsed since the start of all symbol variations, it becomes the effect switching timing, and suddenly starts from the effect operation similar to the variation pattern PA1-1. Switching to production is performed. Then, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 57C shows a specific example of a time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT4-1 in which the re-lottery effect is executed in addition to the effect operation in the variation pattern PT1-1. In the example shown in FIG. 57 (C), as in the case of the variation pattern PT1-1, after all symbols variation and the left symbol are decelerated to a stop, switching to the sudden effect is performed. This is a state in which the fixed decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, a re-lottery effect is executed for 10,000 milliseconds [ms], and during the execution of the re-lottery effect, if the re-lottery effect is a fluctuating promotion failure effect, a definite decorative combination that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed. . On the other hand, if the re-lottery effect is a changing promotion success effect, a definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is derived and displayed. For example, when 9500 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of the re-lottery effect, a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination that becomes the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, and a predetermined time (for example, the re-lottery effect ends) For example, it is only necessary to temporarily stop and display the determined decorative symbol that has been derived and displayed over 500 mm [ms]).

  In S523 of FIG. 54, by referring to the advance notice pattern type determination table 166 as shown in FIG. Either way, it can be determined. As an example, when the notice pattern type CY1 is determined, in S527 of FIG. 54, the notice pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PT1-1 is referred to by referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A as shown in FIG. One of YP1-1 and notice pattern YP1-2 will be determined. Here, when the notice pattern YP1-1 or the notice pattern YP1-2 is determined, the operation is performed when the button operation promotion effect is performed based on the notice effect control pattern determined in S506 shown in FIG. When the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, an effect operation that becomes the line YN1-1 or the line YN1-2 is executed. In the variation pattern PT1-1, it is determined in advance that the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is 4000 milliseconds [ms] from the start of all symbol variations, and the operation button 30 is within the operation effective period. At the timing when the operation is performed, switching to the sudden effect is not performed.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a time schedule of all symbol variation, left symbol deceleration stop, right symbol deceleration stop, middle symbol deceleration stop is assigned to variation pattern PA4-1. It has been. The progression order in the variation display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern PA4-1 is the same as that of the variation pattern PA1-1 described above. However, the variation display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach display state, or the variation display result is “ Corresponding to “big hit” or the like, it is only necessary that the execution time of each display process, the presentation operation other than the decorative display of the decorative symbols, and the like are different. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the time schedule shown in FIG. 58 (A) in response to the first change start command or the second change start command. To do. At this time, corresponding to the fact that the variation pattern PA4-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the variation display result notified by the variation display result notification command, etc., the processing of S503 shown in FIG. The final decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 58 (A), when the display processing of all symbol variation, left symbol deceleration stop, and right symbol deceleration stop is executed in sequence, for example, a “left” and “right” decorative symbol display unit. When the same decorative symbols are aligned and temporarily stopped at 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol variation display state becomes the reach display state (reach establishment). After that, as a normal reach production corresponding to “normal reach”, the middle symbol is decelerated and stopped for 15000 milliseconds [ms] in the “middle” ornament symbol display section 5C, and the final ornament symbol that is a jackpot combination is finally obtained. Derived and displayed as a stop symbol. At this time, it is only necessary to temporarily stop and display the definite decorative symbol that is the big hit combination derived and displayed by the deceleration stop of the middle symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]) until the variable display time elapses.

  FIG. 58 (B) shows a specific example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT2-2 for executing the sudden effect during the reach effect that is the normal reach (during the change after the reach is established). In this case, in response to the fact that the fluctuation pattern PT2-2 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, etc., the finalized symbol that is the big hit combination is determined as the final stop symbol by the processing of S503 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 58 (B), after all symbols change, left symbol deceleration stop, and right symbol deceleration stop, reach is established and the middle symbol deceleration stop is started until the middle symbol is started. An effect operation similar to PA4-1 is executed. On the other hand, in the variation pattern PT2-2, the effect switching timing is reached at the timing when 9000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of deceleration stop of the middle symbol, and from the effect operation similar to the variation pattern PA4-1. , Switching to the sudden effect is performed. Then, a sudden effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms], and a finalized symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a final stop symbol during the execution of the sudden effect. As a result, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  FIGS. 59A, 59B, and 59G-L illustrate an example of the effect operation by the variation pattern PT2-2. In the variation pattern PT2-2, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 59 (A) are started, and then the left symbol as shown in FIG. 59 (B) is decelerated and stopped. Subsequently, after the right symbol is decelerated and stopped, the decorative symbol variation display state as shown in FIG. 59 (G) becomes the reach display state, for example, “reach!” Is reached. The effect operation to notify is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the medium symbol fluctuating speed is reduced in the “medium” decorative symbol display section 5C, and a normal reach effect corresponding to “normal reach” is executed. Thereafter, at the timing when 9000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of the middle symbol deceleration fluctuation, the sudden effect as shown in FIGS. 59 (I) to (L) is switched. Then, when the sudden effect as shown in FIG. 59 (L) is finished, the determined decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (B), in the variation pattern PT2-2 included in the sudden jackpot variation pattern, the variation display time of the decorative symbol is shorter than the variation pattern PA4-1 included in the all-effects jackpot variation pattern. It has become. Then, in the variation pattern PT2-2, after the start of all symbol variations, an effect operation similar to that of the variation pattern PA4-1 is performed. After that, when the effect switching timing is reached, the same effect as the variation pattern PA4-1 is performed. Switching from operation to sudden production is performed. Then, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 60A shows a specific example of a time schedule when the notice pattern YP1-1 is selected corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-1. In this case, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the processing of S523 shown in FIG. 54 refers to the notice pattern type determination table 166 as shown in FIG. In accordance with the random number SR4 for determining the type, the notice pattern type CY1 for executing the notice effect to be “line notice” is determined. Subsequently, in the process of S527 shown in FIG. 54, the advance notice is determined according to the numerical data indicating the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern by referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A as shown in FIG. It is decided to select the pattern YP1-1. Based on these determination results, in the process of S506 shown in FIG. 53, the symbol variation control pattern CPA1-1 corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-1 is read from the symbol variation control pattern table 168A as shown in FIG. 35 and set. At the same time, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1 are read from the notice effect control pattern table 168B as shown in FIG. 36 and set. Is done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed after all symbol variations have started. Then, for example, the operation of the operation button 30 is detected at the timing when 5000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed since the start of all symbol variations (button operation detection). In response to this button operation detection, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 switches from the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 to the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2, the effect operation of the line YN1-1 is executed. Is done. As the decorative symbol display process, similar to the time schedule shown in FIG. 57A, display processes of all symbol variations, left symbol deceleration stop, and right symbol deceleration stop are sequentially executed. At this time, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the non-reach display state, and then the middle symbols are decelerated and stopped without executing the reach effect, and the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination are derived and displayed. If the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected after the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed and before the operation valid period ends, the effect operation of the line YN1-1 is not executed. Thus, as the decorative symbol display process, the same display process as that when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected is sequentially executed. As the operation effective period, for example, a period from when the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is started until the deceleration stop of the left symbol is completed in the variation pattern PA1-1 (7500 milliseconds [ms from the start of all symbol variation] ] Until the elapse of] or the like may be determined in advance. During the operation effective period, the decorative symbols are in the reach display state from the start of all symbol variations until the decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. Any period may be set within the period before the derivation display. Further, when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, the operation of the operation button 30 may not be detected as invalid after that even if the operation effective period has not elapsed. Then, it is sufficient that the effect operation of the dialogue YN1-1 is set to be performed, for example, until 8000 milliseconds [ms] have elapsed from the start of the variable display. In this case, for example, even if an operation of the operation button 30 is detected just before the end of the operation valid period, it is possible to execute the effect operation of the speech YN1-1 for a minimum of 500 milliseconds [ms]. The person can recognize the production contents of the dialogue YN1-1.

  FIGS. 61A to 61D show an example of the effect operation by the variation pattern PA1-1 and the notice pattern YP1-1. In the variation pattern PA1-1, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 61 (A) are started. Thereafter, as the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 by the notice pattern YP1-1, for example, an effect image including a character as shown in FIG. 61 (B) and a message “Turn the button!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. Display. Then, when an operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation valid period, switching from the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 to the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 at the detection timing, etc. Thus, the effect operation of the dialogue YN1-1 as shown in FIG. 61 (C) is executed. Thereafter, for example, the left and right symbols are decelerated and stopped as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 60B shows a specific example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT1-2 in which the sudden effect is executed after the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 similar to that in the case of the notice effect that becomes the “line notice” is performed. A typical example is shown. In this case, based on the fact that the variation pattern PT1-2 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the processing of S523 shown in FIG. 54 refers to the notice pattern type determination table 166 as shown in FIG. Regardless of the random number SR4 for determining the pattern type, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined. That is, in the notice pattern type determination table 166, since all of the random value SR4 is assigned to the notice pattern type CY1 in association with the change pattern PT1-2, when the change pattern PT1-2 is designated, Regardless of the random value SR4 extracted in S522 of FIG. 54, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined. Subsequently, in the processing of S527 shown in FIG. 54, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A as shown in FIG. 32, etc., the notice pattern YP1- regardless of the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern. It is decided to select 1. That is, in the notice pattern determination table 167A, since all the random values SR4 are assigned to the notice pattern YP1-1 in association with the change pattern PT1-2, when the change pattern PT1-2 is designated, Regardless of the random value SR5-1 extracted in S526 of FIG. 54, it is determined when the notice pattern YP1-1 is selected.

  Based on these determination results, in the process of S506 shown in FIG. 53, the symbol variation control pattern CPT1-2 corresponding to the variation pattern PT1-2 is read from the symbol variation control pattern table 168A as shown in FIG. 35 and set. At the same time, the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 and the notice effect control pattern CYP1-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1 are read from the notice effect control pattern table 168B as shown in FIG. 36 and set. Is done. Note that when the variation pattern PT1-2 is designated, it is predetermined to switch to the sudden effect when the button operation is detected. Therefore, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the notice pattern YP1-1 is the notice effect. Only the effect control pattern CYP1-1-1 may be read from the notice effect control pattern table 168B and set.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60B, as in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 60A, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed after all the symbol fluctuations are started. When such a button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed, the operation valid period K1 is entered, and the operation by the operation button 30 is detected effectively. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected at the timing when 5000 milliseconds [ms] has elapsed from the start of all symbol variations (button operation detection), the button operation is performed. At the detection timing, the effect switching timing is reached, and the effect operation similar to the variation pattern PA1-1 is switched to the sudden effect. Subsequently, a sudden effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms], and a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect. As a result, when the sudden effect is finished, a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. After the sudden effect is completed in this way, in the variation pattern PT1-2, the fixed decorative pattern is displayed in a temporary stop state from the execution of the sudden effect until the variable display time of 12000 milliseconds [ms] has elapsed (all symbols). Temporary stop display). As a result, in the variation pattern PT1-2, after the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect, the fixed decorative symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display time has elapsed even after the sudden effect has ended. To continue. Thereafter, in response to the elapse of the variable display time, the reception of the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11, etc., the decorative symbol display section 5L for “left”, “middle”, “right”, 5C and 5R are all stopped and displayed (determined) as a finalized decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol.

  61 (A), (B), and (E) to (H) show an example of the effect operation by the variation pattern PT1-2 and the notice pattern YP1-1. In the variation pattern PT1-2, first, all symbol variations as shown in FIG. 61 (A) are started, and then, as in the case of the variation pattern PA1-1, the notice pattern YP1 as shown in FIG. 61 (B). -1 button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is performed. When the operation of the operation button 30 by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the detection timing becomes the effect switching timing, and switching to the sudden effect as shown in FIGS. 61 (E) to (H) is performed. It is. Then, when the sudden effect as shown in FIG. 61 (H) is finished, a confirmed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed. Thereafter, until the variable display time elapses, the fixed decorative symbol is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, thereby continuing to display the fixed decorative symbol.

  FIG. 60C shows a time schedule when an operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation valid period as another example of the time schedule assigned to the variation pattern PT1-2. In the example shown in FIG. 60C, after the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed and the operation valid period K1 is reached, the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected and 7500 milliseconds from the start of all symbol variations. When [ms] elapses, the operation valid period K1 ends (no button operation is detected). In this case, when the operation valid period K1 ends, the execution of the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 may be ended. Thus, after the operation effective period K1 ends, the effect operation is switched to the sudden effect. The effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is not limited to the timing after the operation effective period K1 ends, and may be the same timing as the operation effective period K1 ends. Subsequently, a sudden effect is executed for 4000 milliseconds [ms], and a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect. In this case, the definite decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination derived and displayed during the execution of the sudden effect is displayed temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 500 milliseconds [ms]), while it changes when the sudden effect ends. As the display time elapses, the decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is completely stopped (determined).

  FIG. 62 shows an example of the progress of the rendering operation from the start to the end of the decorative pattern variation display in the variation pattern PT1-2 and variation pattern PT1-3 in which the sudden effect is executed after the button operation promotion effect is performed. It is a flowchart to show. Each process shown in FIG. 62 is based on the decorative pattern changing process of S162 shown in FIG. 52 based on the design change control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined by executing the process of S506 shown in FIG. It may be realized by executing the process of S544 shown in FIG. 55, or executing the decorative symbol variation end process of S163 shown in FIG.

  In the processing shown in FIG. 62, for example, all symbol variations are displayed in which the ornament symbols are variably displayed on all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5. Is started (ST11). Thereafter, a button operation promotion effect is performed based on various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) read from the notice control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value (ST12). For example, in the variation pattern PT1-2, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed by the notice pattern YP1-1. Further, in the variation pattern PT1-3, the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 is executed by the notice pattern YP2-1 that executes the notice effect as the “monitor notice”.

  When the button operation promotion effect is started in ST12, it becomes an operation effective period, and the operation action on the operation button 30 by the player is detected effectively (ST13). The timing when the button operation promotion effect is started and the timing when the operation is valid may be the same timing or different timings. As an example, after the button operation promotion effect is started, after the effect display indicating the countdown operation such as “3” → “2” → “1” is performed, the operation effective period is set to start the button operation promotion effect. The timing may be different from the start timing of the operation effective period. Thereafter, for example, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period has ended based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, or the effect control process timer value itself. (ST14). For example, if the end of the operation valid period is indicated in the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern or the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value, the detection of the operation on the operation button 30 is invalidated and the operation is performed. What is necessary is just to end an effective period. Alternatively, the operation effective period may be ended when the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined operation effective period end determination value. If the operation valid period has not expired in ST14 (ST14; No), it is determined whether or not a button operation is detected, for example, by checking an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 (ST15). ). If no button operation is detected in ST15 (ST15; No), the process returns to ST14.

  When the operation valid period ends in ST14 (ST14; Yes), or when it is determined that a button operation is detected in ST15 (ST15; Yes), the production operation is switched to the sudden production and the sudden production is executed. Is started (ST16). When the sudden effect ends, all symbols derivation display is performed for derivation and display of the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R (ST17). As a result, the decorative symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed. Thereafter, for example, it is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed based on the control data read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value or the effect control process timer value itself (ST18). If the variable display time has not elapsed in ST18 (ST18; No), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. (ST19), the process returns to ST18. Thus, the decorative symbol derivation display performed in ST17 is continued until the variable display time elapses. On the other hand, if the variable display time elapses in ST18 (ST18; Yes), the decorative symbols are completely stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R. By displaying (ST20), the variation display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern PT1-2 and the variation pattern PT1-3 is terminated.

  Next, the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 in the 15-round big hit state will be described. 63 and 64 are display screen diagrams showing effect images displayed on the image display device 5 in the 15-round big hit state. In FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, display screen diagrams showing effect images displayed on the image display device 5 in the 15-round big hit state are shown in (A) to (Q) as time elapses.

  Out of the 15 round big hits, the big hit excluding the sixth probability variation big hit, as an effect image displayed on the image display device 5, an enemy character (a character in a position hostile to the player) and an ally character (side the player) An image display is performed to produce a story-like effect in which a story in which two characters (a character in a position) fight against each other by fighting is developed. In this effect image, the 9th and subsequent rounds are basically obtained, such as the first normal big hit, the first positive probability big hit, the third normal big hit, the third positive probability big hit, the fourth normal big hit, and the fourth normal big hit. When the player wins a situation that is advantageous to the player as in the case of a big hit that is the first opening mode with a long opening time in the unit round, an indication that the teammate character wins the battle, such as winning the battle, is displayed. Done. In other words, such effect images include the first opening mode control state in which the grand prize opening is opened for 29.5 seconds and the special prize opening is opened for 0.5 seconds for a unit round that has not been executed yet in the round 15 big hit state. It is performed as a suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting which open mode control state is to be performed in the second open mode control state.

  When the 15-round big hit gaming state is started, as shown in (A) to (D), in the first to sixth rounds, the first character 51 that is a teammate character and the second character 52 that is an enemy character. A battle effect is performed, which is an effect of displaying an image in which the fighting fights by fighting. For example, in the first round, as shown in (A), the first character 51 and the second character 52 appear, and a display indicating a message 53 (“Battle start” in the figure) is started. Done. In the fourth round, the first character 51 is attacked as shown in (B). In the fifth round, the second character 52 is attacked as shown in (C). Is displayed. Further, in the sixth round, as shown in (D), a display in which the first character 51 and the second character 52 are developing the offense and defense is performed.

  In the seventh round, as shown in (E), the first character 51 defeats the second character 52 and wins the battle, and the first character 51 as shown in (I). Is displayed on the defeat screen which is an image showing a state where the second character 52 is defeated and defeated in the battle. Of the 15 round big hits, when the first normal big hit and the first probable big hit, the winning screen is displayed in the seventh round. Therefore, when the winning screen is displayed, the first opening mode is surely long in the subsequent rounds. Also, in the case of a big hit other than the first normal big hit and the first probable big hit among the 15 round big hits, the defeat screen is displayed in the seventh round. Therefore, even when the defeat screen is displayed in the seventh round, at that time, in the subsequent rounds, the second opening mode with the short opening time is left as it is or the reverse opening time is long. It is not clear whether it becomes 1 open mode.

  After the victory screen as shown in (E) is displayed in the seventh round, the victory screen is continuously displayed in the eighth to fifteenth rounds as shown in (F) to (G). Then, as shown in (H), after the end of the 15th round, an ending screen that is an image indicating that the big hit gaming state has ended is displayed.

  On the other hand, after the defeat screen as shown in (I) is displayed in the seventh round, a resurrection prayer screen as shown in (J) is displayed in the eighth round. The resurrection prayer screen is based on an image requesting the player to pray that the first character 51 that has been defeated stands up and revives by cheering the first character 51 based on hitting the operation button 30 repeatedly. Become. In this case, when the operation button 30 is operated and an operation detection signal from the operation button 30 is input to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 repeatedly displays an image that falls after the first character 51 rises. Control to do. As a result, when the rebirth prayer screen is displayed, the operation of the operation button 30 by the player really supports the rebirth of the first character 51 (pray for rebirth by operating the operation button 30). A sense of expectation of the specific player can be improved by cooperation between the operation feeling of the operation button 30 and the suggestion effect. In this case, when the operation button 30 is not operated, the display with the first character 51 still falling is continued.

  After the revival prayer screen is displayed, a revival effect image in which an image in which the first character 51 revives and rises is displayed as shown in (M), and the first character 51 does not revive as shown in (K). Either the image or the image is displayed. When an image in which the first character 51 is not restored as shown in (K) is displayed, an ending screen is immediately displayed as shown in (L).

  On the other hand, when the revival effect image is displayed as shown in (M), as shown in (N) to (P), the first character 51 changes the second character 52 in the ninth to fifteenth rounds. A victory screen which is an image showing a state where the player has attacked and defeated and won the battle is displayed. Then, as shown in (Q), after the end of the fifteenth round, an ending screen that is an image indicating that the big hit gaming state has ended is displayed.

  In the suggestion effect as described above, the effect image using the character, in particular, the image indicating whether or not the first character 51 is dominant in the battle situation with the second character 52 is still executed in the 15 round big hit state. For unit rounds that are not, it is suggested which round control is performed in which of the first release mode control state and the second release mode control state. The display control of the effect image during the big hit gaming state including the suggestive effect is executed by the big hit control effect process in S164 of FIG.

  Next, the relationship between the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 and the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 in the 15-round big hit state will be described. 65 and 66 are timing charts showing the relationship between the opening state of the special variable winning ball device 7 and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 in the 15 round big hit state.

  In FIG. 65, (A) shows the state of the open mode at the time of the first normal big hit and the first probability variation big hit, and (D) shows the state of the effect image at the time of these big hits. . In FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the pulse waveform indicates that the open state is changed from the closed state to the open state. In FIG. 65, (B) shows the state of the open state at the time of the second normal big hit and the second probability variation big hit, and (E) shows the state of the effect image at the time of these big hits. . In FIG. 65, (C) shows the state of the open state at the time of the third normal big hit and the third probability variation big hit, and (F) shows the state of the effect image at the time of these big hits. . In FIG. 65, (A) shows the state of the open mode at the time of the fourth normal big hit and the fourth probability variation big hit, and (C) shows the state of the effect image at the time of these big hits. ing. In FIG. 65, (B) shows the state of the open state at the time of the fifth normal big hit and the fifth probability variation big hit, and (D) shows the state of the effect image at the time of these big hits. .

  In the first to seventh rounds, as shown in FIGS. 65 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B), the big winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds at each jackpot. It becomes the 1st opening mode control state used as 1 opening mode. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 65D to 65F and FIGS. 66C and 66D, in the first to sixth rounds, the above-mentioned battle effects are performed for each big hit, and seven rounds. At the eyes, the above-mentioned victory screen or defeat screen is displayed. In the case of the first normal big hit and the first probability variation big hit, the win screen is displayed, and in the other big hits, the defeat screen is displayed.

  In the case of the first normal big hit and the first probable big hit, in the seventh and subsequent rounds, the first open mode control state in which the first open mode is set is controlled, and the victory screen is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (B), (C), (E), and (F), the second normal big hit and the second likelihood variation big hit, and the third normal big hit and the third probability variation big hit are shown in the seventh round. In a predetermined period after the end of, the opening mode and the effect image are controlled to be the same between the second normal jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot and the third normal jackpot and the third probability variation jackpot. Specifically, at the time of these big hits, the open state for 0.5 seconds and the closed state for 0.5 seconds are repeated eight times after the end of the seventh round. That is, at the time of these big hits, after the end of the seventh round, the second opening mode in which the big winning opening is opened for 0.5 seconds is repeated.

  In the case of the second normal big hit and the second probability variation big hit, each of the eight open states after the end of the seventh round is controlled so as to be one unit round, so that a big prize is won after the seventh round. The 8th to 15th rounds are executed in a short period of time based on the fact that the second open mode control state, which is the second open mode in which the mouth opens for 0.5 seconds, is repeated 8 times at 0.5 second intervals. It will be. On the other hand, in the case of the third normal big hit and the third probability variation big hit, the opening state after the seventh round is controlled so that the opening / closing operation is performed within the period of the eighth round which is one unit round. Thus, the 8th round is executed based on the fact that the open state in the second opening mode in which the winning opening is opened for 0.5 seconds after the completion of the 7th round is repeated 8 times at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The third open mode control state is entered.

  In the case of the second normal big hit and the second probability variation big hit, and the third normal big hit and the third probability variation big hit, the open state in the second release mode is 8 at 0.5 second intervals after the seventh round. During the repeated period, the above-mentioned resurrection prayer screen is displayed. At the time of the second normal big hit and the second probable big hit, when the period in which the open state in the second open mode is repeated eight times at 0.5 second intervals ends, the eighth to fifteenth rounds end, The ending screen is displayed immediately without the character 51 being restored. On the other hand, in the case of the third normal big hit and the third probability variation big hit, when the period in which the open state in the second open mode is repeated eight times at intervals of 0.5 seconds is over, only the eighth round is over, and the above-mentioned revival effect An image is displayed. And, in the case of the third normal big hit and the third probability variation big hit, in each round of the ninth round to the fifteenth round, it is controlled to the first release mode control state which becomes the first release mode in which the big winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds. And the above-mentioned victory screen is displayed. Thereafter, an ending display is performed.

  As described above, in the case of the second normal big hit and the second probability variation big hit, and the third normal big hit and the third probability variation big hit, in addition to the first to sixth rounds, a predetermined value after the end of the seventh round is determined. Since the opening mode of the big prize opening and the effect image are the same during the period, the player cannot know which jackpot opening type is controlled by the big winning opening for the round that has not been executed yet. The entertainment image of the player can be improved by the effect image.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (A) to 66 (D), the fourth normal big hit and the fourth likelihood big hit, and the fifth normal big hit and the fifth probability big big hit, in a predetermined period after the end of the seventh round, Control is performed so that the opening mode and the effect image are the same between the fourth normal big hit and the fourth probability variation big hit, and the fifth normal big hit and the fifth probability variation big hit. Specifically, in the case of these big wins, as the round control in the unit round when the interval time (1.5 seconds) longer than the other rounds has passed in the eighth round after the end of the seventh round, Control is performed to set the second opening mode control state, which is the second opening mode in which the special winning opening is opened for 0.5 seconds. The above-mentioned revival prayer screen is displayed in the eighth round in the case of the fourth normal big hit and the fourth probability big hit, and in the case of the fifth normal big hit and the fifth probability big hit.

  At the time of the fourth normal big hit and the fourth probability variation big hit, after the end of the eighth round, the open state for 0.5 seconds and the closed state for 0.5 seconds are repeated seven times. That is, at the time of these big hits, after the end of the eighth round, the second release mode control state that is the second release mode in which the big prize opening is opened for 0.5 seconds is repeated. Then, by controlling each of the seven open states after the end of the eighth round to be one unit round, the second winning opening is opened for 0.5 seconds after the end of the eighth round. Based on the open state in the open mode being repeated seven times at 0.5 second intervals, the ninth to fifteenth rounds are executed in a short period of time. In the period from the ninth round to the fifteenth round in which such a special winning opening is performed, the ending screen is displayed without the first character 51 being restored.

  On the other hand, at the time of the fifth normal big hit and the fifth probability variation big hit, when the eighth round is finished, the above-mentioned restoration effect image is displayed. Then, in each of the ninth to fifteenth rounds, the winning opening is controlled to the first release mode control state that is the first release mode in which the winning opening is opened for 29.5 seconds, and the above-described victory screen is displayed. Thereafter, an ending display is performed.

  As described above, in the case of the fourth normal big hit and the fourth probability variation big hit, and the fifth normal big hit and the fifth probability variation big hit, in addition to the first to seventh rounds, a predetermined value after the end of the seventh round is determined. Since the opening mode of the big prize opening and the effect image are the same during the period, the player cannot know which jackpot opening type is controlled by the big winning opening for the round that has not been executed yet. The entertainment image of the player can be improved by the effect image.

  Next, the relationship between the “big hit” big hit and the “sixth probability change” will be described. FIG. 67 shows a display operation example in the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, a display operation example in the image display device 5, and a special variable winning ball device 7 when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of an opening-and-closing operation | movement in. FIG. 68 shows an example of the display operation when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  At timing T = T20 shown in FIG. 67, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), for example, in response to the start of fluctuation of special symbols in a special game, the decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” The display of the decorative symbols is started in all of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, when the variation pattern is the special PG 3-1, at timings T = T 21 to T 23 shown in FIG. 67, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) to (D), “left” → “right” → “ In a predetermined order such as “medium”, decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” are sequentially stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then at timing T = T23 shown in FIG. 67, for example, FIG. As shown in (E), the surprise effect display for displaying the effect image for notifying that the “surprise accuracy” is reached is started. In addition, after executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” and stopping and displaying a decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination, a sudden effect display may be started.

  In addition, without executing the specific effect, the display of the stunning effect may be started after the decorative symbols that are the non-reach combinations are stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the specific effect of “slip” may be executed, and after the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations are stopped and displayed, the sudden effect display may be started. The specific effect of “end of development chance” may be executed, and the combination of decorative symbols that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 may be stopped and displayed, and then the stunning effect display may be started. In addition, the “normal” reach effect may be executed without executing the specific effect, and the decorative effect display may be started after the decorative symbols to be the reach lose combination are stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the specific effect of “slip” and the reach effect of “normal” may be executed, and the decorative effect display may be started after the decorative symbols that are the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. In addition, the “normal” reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and after passing through the predetermined effect, the decorative pattern that becomes the reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and then the sudden effect display is started. May be. In addition, a specific effect of “slip” and a reach effect of “normal” are executed, and after passing through a predetermined effect, a decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and then a stunning effect display is started. Also good.

  Thereafter, at a timing T = T24 shown in FIG. 67, a confirmed decorative pattern that is a combination of a fixed decorative pattern that is a combination of a non-reach loss and a fixed decorative pattern that is a combination of a non-reach loss and a fixed decorative pattern that is a combination of a non-reach loss is determined. Either one (in this example, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the chance of chance TC1) is stopped (final stop display). At this time, in accordance with the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1, the sudden effect display is continuously executed.

  Thereafter, at a timing T = T25 shown in FIG. 67, on the main board 11 side, in S319, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined prize winning door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, the setting for turning on the solenoid for the big prize opening door for opening the big prize opening is performed. 67, 0.5 seconds later, at timing T = T26 shown in FIG. 67, on the main board 11 side, in S345, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined prize winning door solenoid is stopped via a predetermined solenoid circuit. By doing so, a setting is made to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the large winning opening. At this time, the effect control board 12 displays an effect image for notifying the shift to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode, for example, as shown in FIG. Probability entry display starts. Thus, in the period of the timing T = T23 to T26 shown in FIG. 67, the sudden effect display is executed as a series of effects.

  Then, as an ending effect in response to the end of the two-round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative design change starts.

  FIG. 69 shows a display operation example in the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, a display operation example in the image display device 5, and a special variable winning ball when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probability change”. 10 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an opening / closing operation in the device 7. FIG. 70 shows an example of a display operation when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probability change”.

  At timing T = T30 shown in FIG. 69, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special game, for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols The display of the decorative symbols is started in all of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, when the variation pattern is special PH 3-1, at timings T = T 31 to T 33 shown in FIG. 69, for example, as shown in FIGS. 70 (B) to (D), “left” → “right” → “ After the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” are sequentially stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in a predetermined order such as “medium”, the timing T = T33 shown in FIG. As shown in (E), the surprise effect display for displaying the effect image for notifying that the “surprise accuracy” is reached is started.

  In addition, after performing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” and stopping and displaying the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations, the sudden effect display may be started. In addition, the “normal” reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and after passing through the predetermined effect, the decorative pattern that becomes the reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and then the sudden effect display is started. May be. In addition, a specific effect of “slip” and a reach effect of “normal” are executed, and after passing through a predetermined effect, a decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and then a stunning effect display is started. Also good. Thereafter, at the timing T = T34 shown in FIG. 69, the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 may be stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  Thereafter, at timing T = T35 shown in FIG. 69, on the main board 11 side, in S319, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined prize winning door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, the setting for turning on the solenoid for the big prize opening door for opening the big prize opening is performed. Then, at timing T = T36 shown in FIG. 69 after 0.5 seconds, on the main board 11 side, in S341, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined prize winning door solenoid is stopped outputting via a predetermined solenoid circuit. By doing so, a setting is made to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the large winning opening. At this time, on the side of the effect control board 12, according to the effect control pattern of the CRE 1-1 during hit control, for example, as shown in FIG. The effect display at the start of the big hit is displayed in the center of. In this way, during the period of the timing T = T33 to T36 shown in FIG.

  At the timing T = T37 shown in FIG. 69 after 1.0 second from the opening of the big prize opening, on the main board 11 side, in S343, for example, a predetermined big prize opening door is provided via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, when the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid for starting is set, the large winning opening door solenoid for setting the large winning opening to the open state is set to the on state. At this time, on the side of the effect control board 12, as in the case where the big hit types are “first normal” to “fifth normal” and “first probability variation” to “fifth probability variation”, for example, FIG. As shown in the figure, a notification image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the upper left of the display area, and a big hit effect display for displaying an effect image in the big hit gaming state is executed.

  When 29.0 seconds have passed since the grand prize opening was opened (third release mode) or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls was generated, at timing T = T38 shown in FIG. On the other side, at S345, for example, a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined solenoid for a predetermined prize-winning door is stopped via a predetermined solenoid circuit. Set the solenoid to turn off. Thus, in the big hit of the sixth probability change, in the first round, the winning opening is opened for 0.5 seconds, then closed for 0.5 seconds, and then opened for 29.0 seconds or a predetermined number (for example, It is controlled to the fourth opening mode control state in which the large winning opening is opened in the period until ten (10) winning balls are generated.

  Thereafter, in the period after timing T = T39 shown in FIG. 69, similarly to the cases where the big hit types are “first normal”, “third normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, The number of rounds that open the grand prize opening is less than the first count until 29.5 seconds after the grand prize opening is opened, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. The number of times (for example, “14”) is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, for example, the CPU 103 executes the process of S250 shown in FIG. 45 to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the jackpot determination value data. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to change to the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result as “big hit” before the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the processing of S253, based on the determination that control is made to the big hit gaming state, the big hit types are “first normal” to “fifth normal” and “first positive change” to “sixth positive change”, “surprise”. Decide on one of multiple types. Subsequently, in the process of S271 shown in FIG. 44, a plurality of decorative pattern variation pattern types are selected based on the determination result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, and the like. Decide on either. Subsequently, in the process of S274, based on the determination result in S271, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Here, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135F, 136A to 136D, and 137A to 137D shown in FIGS. 15A to 15D and FIGS. ”To“ 5th normal ”,“ 1st probability variation ”to“ 6th probability variation ”, and“ surprising accuracy ”, and depending on the total number of stored memory, etc. Table data is configured so that Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D shown in FIG. 19 and FIGS. 20A to 20C, the variation varies depending on the determination result of the variation pattern type. The table data is configured so that the pattern can be determined. And the variation pattern determined by referring to any one of the big hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D set in S272 shown in FIG. 44 in S274 is a variation that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Pattern is included.

  With reference to the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135F, 136A to 136D, 137A to 137D and the big hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 139A to 139D configured in this way, the fluctuation pattern type is performed in the process of S271 shown in FIG. After determining the variation pattern in the process of S274, the jackpot type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, “first probability variation” to “sixth probability variation”, and “surprising probability”. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” at a different rate, the number of times of execution of all revariable display operations, etc. it can. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table 139C shown in FIG. 20B and the big hit variation pattern determination table 139D shown in FIG. Data is set so that a variation pattern can be selected. For this reason, for example, the player is a big hit because of the difference in the variation mode such as whether the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo train” is 0, 2 or 3 times. It becomes difficult to predict whether the type is “surprise accuracy” or “sixth probability variation”. As a result, the player predicts in advance, from the number of executions of the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream”, whether it will be a 15-round big hit state, a 2-round big hit state, or a stubborn 15-round big hit state. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to predict in advance whether it will be a two-round big hit game or a fool-like fifteen round big hit state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the decorative display of the decorative symbols.

  When determining the temporary stop symbol by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table, the big hit types are “first normal” to “fifth normal” and “first positive change” to “sixth positive change”, “surprise”. The temporary stop symbols may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the determination is made as “1” or the total number of reserved memories. Further, when determining the notice pattern by referring to the notice pattern determination table, the big hit types are “first normal” to “fifth normal”, “first positive change” to “sixth positive change”, and “surprise”. The notice pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on whether the determination is made or the total number of reserved memories.

  In addition, in the setting of the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 139C shown in FIG. 20B and the setting of the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table 139D shown in FIG. The range of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern assigned to the pattern may be the same. By doing so, it becomes even more difficult for the player to predict whether the jackpot type is “surprise” or “sixth probability change”.

  In addition to determining whether the jackpot type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal”, “first probability variation” to “sixth probability variation”, and “surprising probability”, the total number of reserved memories, etc. Depending on the game, the rate of determination such as whether or not to execute the `` pseudo-ream '' specific effect at a different rate and the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation will vary. Interest can be further improved.

  41, the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is any one of “first normal” to “fifth normal” and “first positive change” to “fifth positive change”. If the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is a first period, a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a second period (for example, 0.5 second) shorter than the first period, Alternatively, in a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the large winning opening. Is executed the first time (for example, “15”). On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is a predetermined period that is a second period shorter than the first period. (For example, for 0.5 seconds) By opening the grand prize opening, the number of rounds for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is less than the first number (for example, “2”) is executed. When the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “sixth probability change”, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a second period in the first round (for example, The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the grand prize opening in 0.5 seconds), and then the special prize opening is closed. The variable winning ball apparatus 7 is temporarily changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and thereafter, a specific period (for example, 29.0 seconds) longer than the second period or a predetermined number (for example, ten) winning balls are generated. By making the grand prize opening in the open state during the period until the game is completed, a round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed once, and thereafter, the round in the big hit gaming state is executed. De once fewer than the first number (e.g. "14") is executed.

  On the other hand, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the decorative symbol variation setting process of S161 shown in FIG. 52 in accordance with the variation pattern designation command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11. After determining the specific effect pattern, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect, and the notice pattern, the effect control pattern corresponding to these determination results is determined. At this time, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the temporary stop display is performed in S504 shown in FIG. Determine the stop symbol.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, a sudden jackpot variation pattern having a shorter variation display time than the all-effects jackpot variation pattern is prepared. In the sudden big hit variation pattern, for example, after all the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” start displaying the decorative symbols, The production operation is performed in the same manner as described above, and the production operation is switched to a sudden production different from the all production big hit variation pattern at the production switching timing determined corresponding to each variation pattern. After that, when the sudden effect ends, the player can recognize that the variation display result will be a “hit” in a shorter time than the all-effects jackpot variation pattern by deriving and displaying a decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination. It becomes like this. As a result, the unexpectedness that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced, and the game entertainment can be improved. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the execution time of the sudden effect is set in advance to be 4000 milliseconds [ms], which is shorter than the execution time of the reach effect that is executed for all effects or complete effects. . For this reason, for example, when the player can recognize that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” by starting the sudden effect, such as an effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect, etc. There is no delay in the period until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit”, for example, when the symbol is derived and displayed.

  In addition, as the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect in the sudden big hit variation pattern, the timing before the decorative symbol variation display state becomes the reach display state is predetermined. As a result, after the start of the decorative display of the decorative design, the display of the decorative design resulting in the variable display result is switched over to the sudden effect for the entire period from the start of the display of the decorative design to the derived display. Since there is a possibility of being displayed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” over the entire period can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “line notice,” “monitor notice,” and “step-up notice” are set to be executable as the notice effect that becomes the “reach notice effect”. Then, for example, in the variation pattern PT1-1 to variation pattern PT1-3, etc., a notice effect that becomes a “reach notice effect” based on the notice pattern type determined in S523 of FIG. 54 or the notice pattern determined in S527. May be executed. In this case, the effect switching timing at which the switch to the sudden effect is included in the timing (period) for executing the notice effect as the “reach notice effect”. In this way, when the notice effect that becomes the “reach notice effect” is executed, the notice effect is changed to the sudden effect, and the notice effect that becomes the “reach notice effect” is executed by deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the unexpectedness and expectation that sometimes the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit”.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT1-4, variation pattern PT2-3, variation pattern PT2-5, and the like, the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed is included in the timing (period) for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. Will be. In this way, when the specific effect of “pseudo-run” is executed, the display is changed to the sudden effect at the timing when the specific effect of “pseudo-run” is executed, and the decorative display of the big hit combination is derived and displayed so It is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the unexpectedness and expectation that the result will be a “hit”.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT2-1 or the like, the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is included in the timing (period) during the mission start effect in which the mission start effect is being executed. In this way, by switching to the sudden effect at the timing during the mission start effect, and deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination, when the mission start effect is executed, the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” The expectation can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT1-5 and the like, the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is included in the timing (period) during the sudden mode start effect in which the sudden mode start effect is being executed. In this way, by switching to the sudden effect at the timing during the sudden accuracy mode start effect, and deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of the big hit combination, the fluctuation display result is unexpectedly “big hit” when the sudden accuracy mode start effect is executed You can improve the fun and fun of the game by increasing the nature and expectations.

  For example, in the variation pattern PT1-2, the variation pattern PT1-3, and the like, the operation effective period in which the operation of the operation button 30 is effectively detected when the button operation promotion effect is executed after all the symbol variations are started. When an operation of the operation button 30 is detected within the operation effective period, switching to the sudden effect is performed at the timing when the button operation is detected. In this way, when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the effect is switched to the sudden effect, and the decorative display of the big hit combination is derived and displayed so that when the operation button 30 is operated, the variation display result is “big hit”. It is possible to improve the effect of the game by enhancing the production effect due to the unexpectedness.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern PT1-2, variation pattern PT1-3, etc., when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected within the operation effective period, switching to the sudden effect is performed after the operation effective period ends. . Thereby, even when the operation of the operation button 30 is not detected, the player can switch to the sudden effect at an appropriate timing, and the player can surely recognize that the variation display result is “big hit”, It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the decorative pattern of the big hit combination is not derived and displayed.

  For example, the rendering operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect in the variation pattern PT1-2, the variation pattern PT1-3, etc. is performed by the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 executed by the notice pattern YP1-1 or the notice pattern YP2-1. The button operation promotion effect BN2-1 is executed and can be executed as a notice effect even when the variation pattern is different from the sudden big hit variation pattern. As a result, the player switches to the sudden effect at the scene that the player recognizes that the notice effect is executed, and by deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination, the unexpectedness that the variable display result becomes `` hit '', The interest of the game can be improved.

  The process of determining the variation pattern type in S271 shown in FIG. 44 and the process of determining the variation pattern in S274 are executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. On the other hand, the process for determining the notice pattern type in S523 shown in FIG. 54 and the process for determining the notice pattern in S527 are executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. As a result, it is possible to execute various notice effects while preventing an increase in the control burden on the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in order to execute the effect operation as the notice effect. You can improve the fun of the game.

  In the setting of the notice pattern classification determination table 166 shown in FIG. 31, the effect form until the sudden effect is executed is the same, and for a plurality of variation patterns with different presence or absence of the sudden effect, the presence or absence of the notice effect and each notice pattern The allocation of the random number SR4 for determining the notice pattern type for the type is the same. Also, in the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. 32 and the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167B shown in FIG. 33, the effect modes until the sudden effect is executed are the same, and the presence or absence of the sudden effect is different. As for the fluctuation pattern, the allocation of the random number value SR5-1 for determining the first warning pattern and the random value SR5-2 for determining the second warning pattern are the same for each of the warning patterns. . For this reason, the ratio of determining whether or not to perform a production operation that becomes a notice effect corresponding to each notice pattern does not depend on whether or not the switch to the sudden effect is performed, and the effect that the switch to the sudden effect is performed. It differs depending on the switching timing. In addition, depending on the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed, the determination rate of the effect operations to be a plurality of types of notice effects such as “Selif notice”, “Monitor notice”, and “Step up notice” will be different. . Thereby, according to the production | presentation operation | movement performed as a notice production | presentation, the expectation of switching to a sudden production | generation can be varied, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  For example, in the case of the variation pattern PT1-2, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. 31, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined regardless of the random number SR4 for determining the notice pattern type, and FIG. By referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A shown, the notice pattern YP1-1 is determined regardless of the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern. On the other hand, for example, in the case of the variation pattern PT1-1, the notice pattern type CY1 is determined according to the random value SR4 for determining the notice pattern type by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 166 shown in FIG. In some cases, the notice pattern YP1-1 may be determined according to the random number SR5-1 for determining the first notice pattern by referring to the notice pattern determination table 167A shown in FIG. In this way, even when the variation pattern is different from the variation pattern that switches to the sudden effect when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the effect operation that becomes the notice effect including the button operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined determination rate. Decided to do. Thereby, the expectation to switch to the sudden effect when the effect operation as the notice effect is executed can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the setting of the big hit variation pattern determination table 139B shown in FIG. 20A, the variation for executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” according to which of the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3. The allocation of the random value MR5 to the pattern is different from each other. Therefore, the determination ratio of the number of executions of the re-variable display operation in the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect varies depending on the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the expectation of when to switch to the sudden effect according to the number of executions of the re-variable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”. .

  In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 167C shown in FIG. 34, the ratio determined as any one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 is made different according to the effect switching timing at which switching to the sudden effect is performed. As described above, the random number SR5-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to each notice pattern according to each variation pattern. In this way, switching to the sudden effect is performed at any timing according to the number of times that the effect operation is switched (the number of times of switching) in the effect of the “step-up notice” and the effect mode in the effect operation performed after the change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the sense of expectation.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 135A, 135B, 135E, and 135F, the total number of reserved storages is within any range of “0” to “2”, “3” to “5”, and “6” to “8”. The variation pattern type so that the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern in which the sudden effect is executed and the proportion determined for each of the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 are different. A random number value MR4 for determination is assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, according to the total number of stored memory that is the total number of stored data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, the sudden big hit variation pattern is selected at a different selection ratio, It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the expectation of switching to the sudden effect.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in S253 of FIG. 43, from among a plurality of types of big hits as shown in FIG. 7 including the first normal and first likelihood change big hits and the second normal and second probability big hits The type of jackpot gaming state is determined. As shown in S114 to S116 of FIG. 41, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, and FIG. 49, in the big hit gaming state, ten winning balls are detected until the predetermined period elapses or before the predetermined period elapses. Until the end condition is satisfied, round control is executed in which the unit round in which the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is performed is repeated a plurality of times. Then, as shown in FIGS. 48, 65 and 66, the control mode of each unit round is, for example, until the first predetermined period such as 29.5 seconds elapses or the first predetermined period elapses. The first open mode control state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the control mode of each unit round until the end condition as described above is satisfied before the first predetermined period. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is short until a second predetermined period such as 0.5 seconds elapses or until an end condition as described above is satisfied before the second predetermined period elapses. Can be controlled to any one of the open mode control states of the second open mode control state in which is changed from the closed state to the open state. As shown in the first normal and first probability change in FIG. 65A, in the big hit game state of the first normal and first probability change, the unit rounds are all controlled to the first release mode control state. As shown in the second normal and second probability variation of FIG. 65 (B), in the second normal and second probability jackpot big hit gaming state, the unit round is the first release mode control state. And a unit round controlled to the second open mode control state, and a big hit of the first normal and first probability variation, and a big hit of the second normal and second probability variation, The overall structure of the unit round throughout the jackpot gaming state is different. Thereby, the interest of the game in the big hit game state can be improved by the opening aspect of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in the big hit game state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) and 18 (B), in addition to the determination that the fluctuation pattern is set to the reach state, the determination that the reach state is not set is made, and In response to being determined to be a variation pattern type including a re-variation display pattern, the variation pattern may be determined to be a non-reach losing variation pattern for executing a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect. Is possible. As a result, the determination of the variation pattern type and the determination of the variation pattern are made differently depending on whether or not the determination to reach the reach state has been made, and the type of variation pattern can be achieved without increasing the control burden. Can be increased. In addition, since the predetermined effect is executed even when the reach is not reached, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (2) As shown in S253 of FIG. 43, from among a plurality of types of jackpot types as shown in FIG. 7 including the big hits of the fourth normal and fourth likelihood changes and the big hits of the fifth normal and fifth probability changes, The type of jackpot gaming state is determined. As shown in S114 to S116 of FIG. 41, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, and FIG. 49, in the big hit gaming state, ten winning balls are detected until the predetermined period elapses or before the predetermined period elapses. Until the end condition is satisfied, round control is executed in which the unit round in which the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is performed is repeated a plurality of times. Then, as shown in FIGS. 48, 65 and 66, the control mode of each unit round is, for example, until the first predetermined period such as 29.5 seconds elapses or the first predetermined period elapses. The first open mode control state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the control mode of each unit round until the end condition as described above is satisfied before the first predetermined period. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is short until a second predetermined period such as 0.5 seconds elapses or until an end condition as described above is satisfied before the second predetermined period elapses. Can be controlled to any one of the open mode control states of the second open mode control state in which is changed from the closed state to the open state. As shown in the fourth normal and fourth probability changes in FIG. 66 (A), in the big hit game state of the fourth normal and fourth probability big hits, the unit round is a big hit like the first to seventh rounds. From the start of the gaming state to the predetermined number of unit rounds, it becomes a unit round controlled to the first release mode control state, and then the second release mode until the end of the big hit gaming state such as the 8th to 15th rounds It is configured to be a unit round controlled to the control state (the same applies to the second normal and second certain variation in FIG. 65B). In addition, as shown in the fifth normal and fifth probability variation of FIG. 66 (B), in the big hit game state of the fifth normal and fifth probability variation, the unit rounds are the first to seventh rounds. From the start of the big jackpot gaming state to the predetermined number of unit rounds, the unit round is controlled to the first release mode control state, and then the second release mode until the predetermined number of unit rounds such as the eighth round. The unit round is controlled to the control state, and thereafter, the unit round is controlled to the first release mode control state until the end of the big hit gaming state such as the ninth to fifteenth rounds (see FIG. The same applies to the third normal and third likelihood variations of 65 (C)). Since the unit round repeatedly executed is composed of a unit round controlled to the first release mode control state and a unit round controlled to the second release mode control state, the fourth normal and fourth probability variation big hits And the big hit of the fifth normal and fifth probability change, the overall configuration of the unit round throughout the jackpot gaming state (the same applies to the relationship between the second normal and second probability change and the third normal and third probability change) . Therefore, even in the jackpot gaming state in which the same number of unit rounds are repeatedly executed, it is possible to provide the player with different ease of winning the game ball throughout the jackpot gaming state, and during the jackpot gaming state Can improve the fun of games in Then, in the big hit big hit gaming state of the fifth normal and fifth probability change (the same applies to the third normal change and the third probability change), the first release mode is once after the release mode control state is once controlled to the second release mode control state. Since it is controlled to the control state, the interest of the game in the big hit game state can be further improved. Thereby, the interest of the game in the big hit game state can be improved by the release mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in the big hit game state in which the control is executed by repeating the unit round the same number of times.

  (3) About the unit round which has not yet been executed in the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, which one of the first opening state control state and the second opening state control state is the opening state control state. Since a suggestion effect including a battle effect that suggests whether round control is to be performed is performed during the execution of the jackpot game state, it is possible to tell which opening mode control state is in effect as a jackpot game The interest of the game during the state can be further improved.

  (4) When the operation control CPU 120 receives an operation detection signal from the operation button 30 in S164 of FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to repeatedly display an image that falls after the first character 51 rises. Since the suggestion effect is executed based on the operation by the button 30, the interest of the game in the big hit gaming state can be further improved by the cooperation of the operation feeling of the operation button 30 and the suggestion effect.

  (5) FIG. 9 shows that the variation pattern type includes a variation pattern type that is a pseudo-continuous variation pattern of CA1-4, CB1-3, and CC1-3. As described above, once the display of the decorative symbols is started and after the display result is derived and displayed, after the suspended symbol is temporarily stopped, re-variation is executed once or multiple times to execute the variable display again for all the decorative symbols. The re-variation effect is performed by the effect control CPU 120. By performing such a re-variation effect, the range of the effect of the variable display can be expanded, so that the entertainment of the game based on the effect of the variable display can be further improved.

  (6) As shown in (C) of FIG. 65, in the third big hit and big hit big hit game state, as the second release mode control state, one predetermined unit round of the eighth round However, in the second normal and second probable big hit jackpot gaming states shown in FIG. 65 (B), the same as in the release state control state until the end of the big hit gaming state such as the eighth round to the fifteenth round. By performing the control in the 2 release mode control state, even if the 2nd release mode control state is set in the big hit game state, the big hit game state at that point in time is the second normal and second probability change big hits and the second big change game state. Since the player cannot discriminate whether the game is 3 normal or the 3rd probability jackpot, the interest of the game in the jackpot gaming state can be further improved. Further, in this way, the control is performed so that the second opening state control state is the same as the opening state control state after the predetermined number of unit rounds in the first big hit gaming state until the end of the big hit gaming state for one unit round. Since it is possible to earn time for the player to feel the expectation during the performance, it is possible to more effectively perform the effect for the purpose of improving the interest of the game in the big hit gaming state.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 12, reach of fluctuation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2-1, PT2-3 to PT2-5, PT2-7, PT3-1, PT3-3, PT3-4, etc. Due to the forward sudden big hit fluctuation pattern, the change display state of the decorative design is switched to the specific effect before the reach display state reaches the reach state, and the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect 11, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5-1 to PA5-3, PA6-1 to PA6-5, PA7-1, PA7-2, PA8-1 to PA8-3, PA9-1. The specific display result is derived and displayed in a shorter variation display time than the effect jackpot variation pattern such as ~ PA9-5. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation display state of the decorative pattern is changed to the reach state by the sudden reach big hit variation pattern such as the variation patterns PT2-2, PT2-6, PT3-2, PT3-5, PT3-6. After that, the effect is switched to a specific effect, and the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect, resulting in a specific display result with a shorter variation display time compared to the overall effect jackpot variation pattern Is derived and displayed. As a result, it is determined that the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed when the performance operation is switched to the specific performance, and the unexpectedness of becoming the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is improved, and the entertainment of the game is improved. be able to. In addition, the change display state of the decorative symbol is switched to the specific effect even before the reach display state changes to the reach state due to the sudden hit big hit fluctuation pattern of the reach, so that the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination throughout the period when the decorative symbol is variably displayed. Can increase the sense of anticipation and improve the fun of the game.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 60B that the sudden effect is started by “button operation detection”, the sudden effect change pattern switches to the specific effect at the timing when the operation button 30 is operated. As shown in (B) that all symbols temporarily stop display is performed following the sudden effect, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect, compared to the all effect jackpot variation pattern The final stop symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed in a short variation display time. Thereby, when the operation button 30 is operated, if the production operation is switched to the specific production, it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, when the operation button 30 is operated, the final stop symbol of the big hit combination It is possible to improve the effect of the game by enhancing the production effect due to the unexpectedness that is derived and displayed.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 12, reach of fluctuation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2-1, PT2-3 to PT2-5, PT2-7, PT3-1, PT3-3, PT3-4, etc. Due to the forward sudden big hit fluctuation pattern, the change display state of the decorative design is switched to the specific effect before the reach display state reaches the reach state, and the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect 11, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5-1 to PA5-3, PA6-1 to PA6-5, PA7-1, PA7-2, PA8-1 to PA8-3, PA9-1. The specific display result is derived and displayed in a shorter variation display time than the effect jackpot variation pattern such as ~ PA9-5. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation display state of the decorative pattern is changed to the reach state by the sudden reach big hit variation pattern such as the variation patterns PT2-2, PT2-6, PT3-2, PT3-5, PT3-6. After that, it switches to the specific effect at the effect switching timing, and the specific display result is derived and displayed at the end of the specific effect, so that the specific display result is derived and displayed in a shorter variation display time than the all effect jackpot variation pattern Is done. Thereby, it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed when the effect operation is switched to the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the unexpectedness of the specific display result and improve the interest of the game. Further, in response to determining that the variation pattern is any one of the variation patterns PT1-1 to PT1-4, PT2-1 to PT2-7, PT3-1 to PT3-6 in S274 of FIG. 44, S523 of FIG. , After executing the process of S527, the process of S544 of FIG. 55 is executed based on the effect control pattern determined in S506 of FIG. 53. Since it is switched to the specific effect even before the game reaches the reach state, it is possible to enhance the expectation that the specific display result will be obtained over the entire period during which the decorative symbols are variably displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of the plurality of pre-switching effect operations according to the effect switching timing at which the effect is switched to the specific effect. Thereby, according to the effect | action effect | action performed, the expectation of switching to a specific effect | action at different timings can be varied, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  (10) When the big hit is determined to be the sixth positive variation big hit type by executing the image display shown in FIG. 70 and the like by the effect processing during the big hit control in S164 of FIG. As in the case of, when controlled to the second release mode control state, and when controlled to the second release mode control state in this way, a series of special effects are executed in the same manner as in the case of sudden hit. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the big hit is a big hit or a sixth probability variation, and a more surprising performance is executed during the display of the decorative symbols and in the big hit game state. be able to.

  (11) As shown in S274 of FIG. 44, the change pattern is determined by referring to the big hit change pattern determination tables 139A to 137D shown in FIGS. Which one of the plurality of performance operations is executed depends on whether the type of jackpot is determined to be the first normal or first probability variation jackpot or the sixth probability variation jackpot is determined. Since it is determined at a different ratio, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the variation display of the decorative symbols.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above embodiment, in the variation pattern type setting table 140 shown in FIG. 9, the “sudden short” variation pattern type CA4-1, the “sudden middle” variation pattern type CA4-2, and the “sudden long” In the above description, a plurality of types of variation pattern types are set so as to include a variation pattern type CA4-3. However, the plurality of types of variation patterns may be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As an example, one variation pattern type including all of the sudden jackpot variation patterns for executing sudden effects may be provided. In this case, it is determined whether or not the sudden effect is executed by determining the variation pattern type in S271 shown in FIG. 44, and the sudden effect is executed by determining the variation pattern in S274. The effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is determined.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15A, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. 15B, and the big hit fluctuation pattern type shown in FIG. In the determination table 135E and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 135F shown in FIG. 16B, the allocation of the random value MR4 for a plurality of types of variation pattern types is described as different depending on the total number of reserved storage. That is, in the above embodiment, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, and the jackpot type is “normal” and “probable change” based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. When it is determined to be any one of "", it has been described that the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern is made different depending on the total number of reserved memories. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state or a short-time state, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern may be varied according to the total number of reserved memory. Good. Further, when either one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern is made different according to the total reserved memory number, whereas when the other is satisfied, the total reserved memory number The sudden big hit variation pattern may be selected at a rate that does not depend on.

  (3) In the above embodiment, it has been described that the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern varies depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sudden big hit variation pattern may be selected at a rate that does not depend on the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the above embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short”, the variation pattern of “sudden middle” The ratio determined as either the type CA4-2 or the variation pattern type CA4-3 of “suddenly long” is varied. Thereby, the determination ratio of the effect switching timing switched to the sudden effect is varied depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is. In addition to this, or separately from this, the ratio determined as one of a plurality of types of sudden big hit variation patterns differs depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a plurality of types. You may make it let. As an example, when the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 is determined in S271 shown in FIG. 44, the variation pattern determination table set in S272 shown in FIG. You may make it differ according to whether the gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is a plurality of types. In the variation pattern determination table used at this time, the allocation of the variation pattern random number MR5 for each variation pattern may be different depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  (4) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, if the big hit type is “normal”, the sudden big hit variation pattern is not selected, while the big hit type is “probable change”. ”, It is explained that the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern can be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state, as in the case of the probable variation state, when the jackpot type is “normal” While the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern is not selected, when the big hit type is “probable change”, the sudden big hit fluctuation pattern may be selectable. Alternatively, even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, the sudden big hit variation pattern can be selected even if the big hit type is “normal”, but the big hit type is “probable change”. In comparison, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern may be lowered. As described above, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern may be varied depending on whether the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probable change”. In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state or a short-time state, the presence or absence of a sudden effect is determined depending on whether the jackpot type is determined as “normal” or “probable change” ( A probability variation state), a variation pattern type CA4-1 of “sudden short”, a variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle”, and a variation pattern type CA4-3 of “sudden long” (In the case of short-time state) is different. Thereby, the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is varied depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “normal” or “probability change”. In addition to this, or separately, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “normal” or “probability”, the ratio determined for any one of multiple types of sudden jackpot fluctuation patterns , You may make it different. As an example, when the change pattern type CA4-1 to change pattern type CA4-3 is determined in S271 shown in FIG. 44, the change pattern determination table set in S272 shown in FIG. It may be made different depending on whether the type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”. In the variation pattern determination table used at this time, the allocation of the variation pattern determination random value MR5 for each variation pattern may differ depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “normal” or “probability variation”. That's fine.

  (5) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the selection of the sudden big hit variation pattern is made according to which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. I explained that the ratio was different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the first start condition and the second start condition The sudden big hit variation pattern may be selected at a rate that does not depend on which is established. Alternatively, even when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state or a short-time state, the selection ratio of the sudden big hit variation pattern differs depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. You may make it let. In the above embodiment, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the “sudden short” variation pattern type CA4 depends on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. −1, the variation pattern type CA4-2 of “sudden middle” and the variation pattern type CA4-3 of “sudden long” are different. Thereby, the determination ratio of the effect switching timing for switching to the sudden effect is varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. In addition to this, or separately from this, depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the ratio determined as one of a plurality of types of sudden big hit fluctuation patterns is established. You may make it differ. As an example, when the change pattern type CA4-1 to change pattern type CA4-3 is determined in S271 shown in FIG. 44, the change pattern determination table set in S272 shown in FIG. It may be made different depending on which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. In the variation pattern determination table used at this time, if the allocation of the variation pattern random number MR5 for each variation pattern is different depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, Good.

  (6) In the above embodiment, the operation of the operation button 30 is performed within the operation effective period after the button operation promotion effect is executed in the notice effect that becomes the “line notice” or the notice effect that becomes the “monitor notice”. The description has been made assuming that the effect mode of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is changed once by switching the notice effect control pattern once in response to being detected once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode of the effect operation as the notice effect may be switched a plurality of times in response to the operation of the operation button 30 being detected a plurality of times. As an example, in the notice pattern YP1-2, after the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed, when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the notice effect is executed so that the effect operation that becomes the line YN1-1 is executed. The control pattern or the like may be switched, and when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the notice effect control pattern or the like may be switched so as to execute the effect operation that becomes the dialogue YN1-2. In this case, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 and the effect mode are started when a predetermined time elapses after starting the effect operation becoming the serif YN1-1 or starting the effect operation becoming the serif YN1-1. The same or separate button operation promotion effect may be performed to detect the operation of the operation button 30 effectively. And, as the sudden big hit variation pattern that switches to the sudden effect at the timing when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the variation pattern that switches to the sudden effect using the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected once as the effect switching timing, and Alternatively, a variation pattern for switching to the sudden effect using the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected a plurality of times as the effect switching timing may be prepared in advance.

  (7) In the above embodiment, as the sudden big hit variation pattern that switches to the sudden effect at the timing when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected, the notice effect that is executed before the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the reach display mode It has been described that a variation pattern is provided in which the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected is switched to the sudden effect as the effect switching timing after the similar button operation promotion effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the operation of the operation button 30 is detected after the button operation promotion effect is executed in the reach effect executed after the decorative design is derived and displayed in the reach display mode. A variation pattern for switching to the sudden effect as the effect switching timing may be prepared in advance. In this case, as the button operation promotion effect executed in the reach effect, for example, an effect operation for selecting an effect mode of the reach effect that becomes a super reach that develops from the normal reach, or a change proceeds after the reach effect is started. It is only necessary to set in advance such that an effect operation or the like that targets the decorative symbols being made to be a big hit combination can be executed.

  (8) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the processing of S501 to S506 shown in FIG. The description has been made assuming that the design, the temporary stop design, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice pattern, the effect control pattern, and the like are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of a mission start effect, the contents of the mission, and the final stop pattern by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the effect operation, for example. The determination of the temporary stop symbol, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice pattern, the effect control pattern, etc. may be executed in a shared manner.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 71 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 180, a ROM 181, a RAM 182, a random number circuit 183, and an I / O 184 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 180 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 180 executes a program read from the ROM 181, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 180 reads fixed data from the ROM 181, the display control CPU 180 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 182 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 180 loads the RAM 182 into the RAM 182. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for the display control CPU 180 to receive input of various signals from the outside of the display control board 16 via the I / O 184, and the display control CPU 180 for the I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O184 is also performed.

  In this case, the CPU 180 for display control, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, the processing of S501 to S506 shown in FIG. By executing all or part of them, at least one of the presence / absence of the mission start effect, the content of the mission, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, the presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice pattern, and the determination of the effect control pattern May be executed. Alternatively, the display control CPU 180 executes all or part of the processes of S160 to S165 shown in FIG. 52, thereby displaying the effect image on the image display device 5 including the decorative pattern variation display. The production operation may be controlled. The display control CPU 180 may execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation.

  In addition, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit, the lamp control circuit, and the like mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to become the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above-described embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU and the like, but the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the processing executed by the CPU 120 for effect control in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 etc. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  (9) In the above embodiment, it has been described that a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” can be executed during the variation display of decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect operation that is another specific effect such as a specific effect of “slip” may be set to be executable. Here, in the specific effect of “slip”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols on the display unit (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L, 5R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, “1” of the decorative symbol display units temporarily displayed. ”Or“ 2 ”) in the decorative symbol display section (for example, one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display section 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display section 5R) and then stop after changing the decorative pattern again. By displaying, the effect display which changes the decorative design to be stopped is performed. In this case, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “slip” is prepared in advance. When the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern in S274 of FIG. 44, for example, among a plurality of types of specific effects such as a “slip” specific effect and a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, It suffices to determine which specific effect is to be executed. When the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “slip” is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table prepared in advance in S504 in FIG. The decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed with the specific effect of “slip” may be determined based on the final stopped symbol determined in S505, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value, or the like. It should be noted that the specific effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” and the sudden effects have different effects on the effects. In other words, specific effects such as “pseudo-run” and “slip” indicate that the variation display state of the decorative pattern may be a reach display state, and that the variation display result may be a “big hit”. This is an effect operation for notifying the player by the decorative display variation display mode, etc. When these specific effects are performed, the variation display result may be “big hit”. Instead, it may become a “losing”. On the other hand, the sudden effect is started when the effect switching timing is reached during the variation display of the decorative symbol when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation”. This is a production operation, and when a sudden production is performed, the fluctuation display result is always “big hit”.

  (10) In the above embodiment, the button operation promotion effects BN1-1 to BN1-5 executed corresponding to the notice patterns YP1-1 to YP1-5 are different from each other. It may be an effect operation that becomes an effect mode, or may be an effect operation that becomes a common effect mode. In addition, a part of the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 to button operation promotion effect BN1-5 may include an effect operation that is a common effect mode. Further, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 to the button operation promotion effect BN1-5 executed corresponding to each of the notice pattern YP1-1 to the notice pattern YP1-5, and the notice pattern YP2-1 to the notice pattern YP2-5. The button operation promotion effects BN2-1 to the button operation promotion effects BN2-5 that are executed in response to each of them may be effect operations that are different from each other, and each is a common effect mode It may be a production operation. In addition, the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 to part of the button operation promotion effect BN1-5 and the button operation promotion effect BN2-1 to part of the button operation promotion effect BN2-5 are effect operations that become a common effect mode. May be included. And, as the button operation promotion effect, when an effect operation that is a common effect mode is performed, the operation of the operation button 30 is detected after the button operation promotion effect is executed in the common effect mode. Thus, the notice effect having a different effect mode is executed according to the notice pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize the jackpot reliability of the notice effect for the first time by operating the operation button 30. In addition, in the case of setting a plurality of types of effect modes of button operation promotion effect, the correspondence between the effect mode in the button operation promotion effect and the effect operation for informing the lines and the effect operation for causing the character to appear in the monitor, It is not necessary to have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, after performing an effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-1, the dialogue YN1-1 may be executed, or the dialogue YN1-2 may be executed. Alternatively, when the effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-1 is executed, the effect operation that becomes the button operation promotion effect BN1-2 (the effect mode is different from the button operation promotion effect BN1-1) is executed. In any case, the line YN1-1 may be executable.

  (11) In the above embodiment, the “step” is determined by changing the ratio determined to any one of the notice pattern YP3-1 to the notice pattern YP3-4 according to the effect switching timing at which the switch to the sudden effect is performed. The number of steps in the notice effect that is “up notice” is determined as one of a plurality of steps at a different determination ratio depending on the effect switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the effect mode in the effect operation that becomes the notice effect can be changed a plurality of times step by step, the number of changes in the effect mode is changed at different determination ratios depending on the effect switching timing. What is necessary is just to determine to any of a plurality of types. Here, as the notice effect that can change the effect mode a plurality of times in stages, for example, the effect that the displayed characters increase stepwise or the action of the displayed characters changes stepwise It is sufficient if it is a directing operation.

  (12) In the above embodiment, when the big hit type is “normal” or “probability change” and the sudden effect is not executed, when the variation pattern type is determined in S271 shown in FIG. 44, either normal reach or super reach is selected. 44. When determining whether or not the reach effect is to be executed and determining the variation pattern in S274 shown in FIG. 44, it is assumed that the reach effect to be executed is selected from the super reach α and the super reach β. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variation pattern type is determined in S271 shown in FIG. 44, it may be determined which one of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed. . As an example, as a variation pattern type when the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” and the sudden effect is not executed, it corresponds to each of multiple types of reach effects such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. The variation pattern type is set in advance. Then, in S271 shown in FIG. 44, the change pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types, so that it is determined which reach effect is to be executed among normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. do it.

  Also, when the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode is “reach”, when the variation pattern type is determined in S271 shown in FIG. 44, either reach effect of normal reach or super reach is executed. 44. When determining the variation pattern in S274 shown in FIG. 44, it is possible to determine which reach effect is to be executed among the reach effects to be a plurality of types of super reach. As an example, when the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode is “reach”, the fluctuation pattern type is a separate fluctuation pattern type for normal reach and super reach, but is super reach α? Regardless of whether it is super reach β, it is set in advance so that it becomes a common variation pattern type. That is, both the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect that becomes the super reach α and the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach effect that becomes the super reach β need only be associated in advance with the fluctuation pattern type of “super reach”. . Then, in S271 shown in FIG. 44, a change pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types, thereby determining which reach effect is to be executed among normal reach and super reach. In S274 shown in FIG. By determining the variation pattern, it is sufficient to determine which one of the reach effects is to be executed among the super reach α and the super reach β.

  (13) In the above embodiment, in the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. The description has been made assuming that the random value MR2 is not assigned. For this reason, the variation display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern type CA5-1 and the variation pattern type CA5-2, is the first special display. While it may be performed corresponding to the special game using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A, it is performed corresponding to the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. It will not be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprising”. Good. In this case, depending on whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the number of random value MR2 for determining the big hit type assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” is made different. A case where the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition; and a case where the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition; Thus, the ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “accurate” may be varied. In this case, the variation display of the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern type CA5-1 and the variation pattern type CA5-2, The game may be performed in response to a special game using either the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, when the variation special figure designation buffer value can be set to “surprise” corresponding to both “1” and “2”, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol A common variation pattern can be used when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. For the variation pattern type, if the table data of the variation pattern type determination table is configured to include a common variation pattern type when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. Good. As a result, when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, it is possible to determine a common variation pattern type. Regardless of which of the second start conditions is satisfied, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  (14) In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice pattern type in S523 shown in FIG. 54, after determining the notice pattern type including the presence or absence of the notice effect, in S527. The description has been made assuming that the notice pattern is determined on the assumption that the notice effect is executed when the notice pattern is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice pattern type, and the decision of the notice pattern may all be determined in one process. If it is determined that there is an effect, the type of the notice effect may be determined. Alternatively, when the notice pattern is determined in S527, the notice pattern may be determined including the presence or absence of the notice effect.

  (15) In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol to be the reach-losing combination in S503 shown in FIG. 53, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L and 5R are displayed. In addition to determining the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed together, the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display portion 5C, and the stopped symbols on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L and 5R. It has been described that the design difference with the decorative design to be determined is also determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol displayed on the “middle” decorative symbol display unit 5C and the decorative symbols displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display units 5L and 5R are stopped. For example, the CPU 103 may determine the design difference from the decorative design on the main board 11 side in accordance with the determination of the variation pattern, and notify the design control board 12 side by a predetermined production control command.

  (16) In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol that is a non-reach combination in S503 shown in FIG. 53, the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right outcome determination table Referring to 161, the description has been given assuming that the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the confirmed decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display unit 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display units You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  (17) In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 41, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Was described as being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern Regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the numerical data indicating the random number value SR4 for determining the type and the numerical value data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the variation pattern are common. Numerical data may be used.

  For example, depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach loss variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach loss variation pattern type determination table In addition, it is possible to prepare in advance a different allocation of random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on SR4, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern type common to the case where the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the determination process for determining whether or not the decorative symbol variation display state is set to the reach state, different processes are executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state is made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while numerical data indicating the reach determination random number value MR3. Regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the common numerical data may be used. Further, for example, instead of the process of S253 shown in FIG. 43A in the above embodiment, as a process of determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types, the case where the first start condition is satisfied and the second Different processes may be executed when the start condition is satisfied. In this case, the process for determining the jackpot type is different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is met, while the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type Regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the common numerical data may be used.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, the two-round big hit state is controlled based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It was described as being controlled by However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, or in addition to this case, the case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” or the fluctuation display result is “ A case where the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” may be provided. In this case, the first and second special figure display result determination tables 130A and 130B assign the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result to the small hit determination value data corresponding to the fluctuation display result of “small hit”. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that data may be included. Alternatively, in the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the random number value MR1 is assigned to the small hit determination value data, while in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the random number MR1 is not assigned to the small hit determination value data. Therefore, when the special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the variation display result may not be “small hit”. The jackpot type determination table 131 is configured to include table data for assigning the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type to the jackpot type of “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” according to the special figure designation buffer value. It only has to be done.

  When the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable winning operation for opening the big winning opening is performed as a two-time open game in the same manner as the two round big hit state. Then, after the variable winning operation is completed, the game state before the change display result is “small hit” is continued, and the game state is not changed. As a result, even if the player recognizes that an open game will be performed twice, the player's expectation on whether or not the game will be in a probable state after the completion of the two open game is increased, and the game interest is improved. be able to.

  Also, when the big hit type is “suddenly short” when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, if the big hit type is “suddenly normal” when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. As a result, even if the player can recognize that the player will be in the 2-round jackpot state, the player's expectation for the gaming state controlled after the end of the two-round jackpot state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved. it can.

  (19) In the above embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the short time state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variation display result is “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily satisfying the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, probability variation control is continuously performed, and advantageous release control is performed to increase the possibility of a game ball entering the second start winning opening. A high base state and a high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure variation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low base state where the special figure variation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is "probability change" or "surprise", after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state. May be. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise”, the ratio that is controlled to either the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends , They may be different from each other.

  (20) The device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. do not depart from the spirit of the present invention. Any change and modification can be made within the range. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (21) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, You may take the form distributed by pre-installing in the memory | storage device which a computer apparatus etc. have. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  (22) The execution form of the game is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line etc. in an internal memory or the like. Or a form directly executed using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (23) As the round control in the big hit gaming state, as the specific gaming state, a variable winning device (special variable winning ball device) until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. 7) Even if it is possible to execute round control in which a unit round (one round) for performing open mode control for changing the second state (closed state) to the first state (open state) is executed a plurality of times. Good.

  (24) The effect of displaying the rebirth prayer screen shown in FIG. 64 and the like may be executed when an ending screen, which is an image indicating that the big hit gaming state has ended, is displayed. The effect of displaying the rebirth prayer screen may be executed once or a plurality of times in the jackpot gaming state.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, in a specific jackpot gaming state (probable fake 15 round jackpot state), the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the fourth open state control state (0 .5 seconds + 29.0 seconds of release), and in each of the second to fifteenth rounds, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the first release mode control state (opening of 29.5 seconds). An example was given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a specific jackpot gaming state (15-round jackpot state), as a unit round executed for the first time, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled in the second release mode control state (0.5 seconds). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 may be controlled to be in the first opening mode control state (opening for 29.5 seconds) in each of the second to fifteenth rounds (this is opened for 29.5 seconds). In the second release mode control state, the number of times of opening for 0.5 seconds may be one time or two times).

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, the number of times that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the second opening mode control state (opening for 0.5 seconds) in the specific jackpot gaming state (crash 15-round big hit state). An example in which is one time is shown. However, the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to the second opening state control state (opening for 0.5 seconds) in a specific jackpot gaming state (probable fake 15 round jackpot state) is plural. Times (a predetermined number of times equal to or greater than 2).

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine that does not display the number of rounds to be executed in the big hit gaming state at the time of the big hit is shown as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine equipped with a round display unit for performing display (round notification display) for specifying how many rounds are executed in the big hit gaming state at the big hit as described above. Also good. The round display unit may be constituted by the image display device 5 (for example, when a big hit occurs, a part of the display area of the image display device 5 may be used as the round display unit). You may comprise by a separate display apparatus. In the configuration including such a round display unit, a game value of a certain degree (at least two rounds) is given to the player by performing a display specifying how many rounds are to be executed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. Therefore, in the gaming machine provided with such a round display unit, the degree of improvement of the interest of the game by the control in the big hit gaming state described above can be further increased. Further, in the case where such a round display unit is provided, even when the same round is displayed by the round display unit, control with different opening modes is performed as described in the above embodiment. Since there are times, it is possible to make the game value (ball game) actually obtained by the player different, so that it is possible to improve the fun of the game so that the player is not bored in the big hit game state.

  (28) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  200 gaming areas, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 7 special variable winning ball apparatus, 100 gaming control microcomputer, 120 effect control CPU, 30 operation buttons, 101, 121 ROM.

Claims (2)

There is provided a variable display device that displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, each of which is played by hitting a game ball into the game area, and a specific display result in which the variable display result of the identification information is predetermined. A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when
A variable winning device that changes between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player in the gaming area;
Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state and the type of the specific gaming state before the variation display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the identification information based on a determination result by the prior determination means;
As the specific gaming state, mode control for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Specific gaming state control means capable of executing round control for repeatedly performing a unit round to be performed a plurality of times;
During the variation display of the identification information, a variation display effect corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination unit is executed, and a specific game state effect corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is performed in the specific game state. Production execution means to perform,
The pre-determining means determines the type of the specific game state from among a plurality of types of specific game states including a first specific game state and a second specific game state for performing control to repeatedly execute the unit round the same number of times. Decide
The specific gaming state control means includes
The control mode of the unit round is changed from the second state to the first state until the first predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the first predetermined period elapses. A first mode control state to be changed to
Until the second predetermined period shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the second predetermined period elapses, the variable prize apparatus is moved from the second state to the second state. It is controllable to any aspect control state with the 2nd aspect control state changed to 1 state,
In the first specific gaming state, all the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state,
In the second specific gaming state, the unit round that is repeatedly executed is controlled to the first mode control state or the second mode control state,
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display units as a variable display unit that displays the identification information in a variable manner.
The specific game state control means is configured to use the round control as the specific game state when a variation display result of the identification information sequentially derived and displayed by the plurality of variation display units becomes a predetermined specific display result. Is possible and
As the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, further includes a variation pattern storage unit that stores a plurality of variation patterns,
The plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means are:
Reach effect after starting the variation display of the identification information on all of the plurality of variation display units, and then displaying the identification information in a reach state in some variation display units among the plurality of variation display units. And the all-effects specific variation pattern for deriving and displaying the specific display result when the reach effect ends,
The variation display time is shorter than the all effect specific variation pattern, and is the same as the effect operation by the all effect specific variation pattern at a predetermined effect switching timing during the variation display of the identification information. Switching from the production operation to the production operation different from the production operation by the all production specific variation pattern, and including the sudden specific variation pattern for deriving and displaying the specific display result when the specific production is finished,
The sudden specific variation pattern includes a pre-reach sudden specific variation pattern that becomes the effect switching timing before the variation display state of the identification information reaches the reach state, and a variation display state of the identification information that reaches the reach state. A game machine including a plurality of sudden specific variation patterns including a post-reach sudden specific variation pattern serving as the effect switching timing. There is provided a variable display device that displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, each of which is played by hitting a game ball into the game area, and a specific display result in which the variable display result of the identification information is predetermined. A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when
A variable winning device that changes between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player in the gaming area;
Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state and the type of the specific gaming state before the variation display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the identification information based on a determination result by the prior determination means;
As the specific gaming state, mode control for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state until a predetermined period elapses or until an end condition is satisfied before the predetermined period elapses. Specific gaming state control means capable of executing round control for repeatedly performing a unit round to be performed a plurality of times;
During the variation display of the identification information, a variation display effect corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determination unit is executed, and a specific game state effect corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit is performed in the specific game state. Production execution means to perform,
The pre-determining means determines the type of the specific game state from among a plurality of types of specific game states including a first specific game state and a second specific game state for performing control to repeatedly execute the unit round the same number of times. Decide
The specific gaming state control means includes
The control mode of the unit round is changed from the second state to the first state until the first predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the first predetermined period elapses. A first mode control state to be changed to
Until the second predetermined period shorter than the first predetermined period elapses or until the end condition is satisfied before the second predetermined period elapses, the variable prize apparatus is moved from the second state to the second state. It is controllable to any aspect control state with the 2nd aspect control state changed to 1 state,
In the first specific gaming state, all the unit rounds that are repeatedly executed are controlled to the first mode control state,
In the second specific gaming state, the unit round that is repeatedly executed is controlled to the first mode control state or the second mode control state,
It further comprises operating means that can be operated by the player,
The variable display device has a plurality of variable display units as a variable display unit that displays the identification information in a variable manner.
The specific game state control means is configured to use the round control as the specific game state when a variation display result of the identification information sequentially derived and displayed by the plurality of variation display units becomes a predetermined specific display result. Is possible and
As the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, further includes a variation pattern storage unit that stores a plurality of variation patterns,
The plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means are:
Reach effect after starting the variation display of the identification information on all of the plurality of variation display units, and then displaying the identification information in a reach state in some variation display units among the plurality of variation display units. And the all-effects specific variation pattern for deriving and displaying the specific display result when the reach effect ends,
The variation display time is shorter than the all-effects specific variation pattern, and the variation display state of the identification information is reached after the variation display of the identification information is started in all of the plurality of variation display units. Before entering the state, after the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means is executed in parallel with the fluctuation display of the identification information, the operation is switched to the specific effect and specified when the specific effect ends. And the sudden change pattern that derives and displays the display result,
The effect executing means switches to the specific effect at a timing when the operation means is operated within the operation effective period during the operation promotion effect by the sudden specific variation pattern, and when the specific effect ends. A gaming machine in which after the specific display result is derived and displayed, the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed until the variation display time of the identification information by the predetermined sudden variation pattern has elapsed.

Images